Home

Model 48i-HL - User Manual

1. Command Description Page low coef 1 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from lo multi point B 28 calibration low coef 2 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from lo multi point B 28 calibration low range Reports sets current CO low range B 35 low ratio Reports sample reference ratio calculated using the low B 13 averaging time low sp conc Reports sets low span concentration B 29 Ir Reports the last Irec stored B 21 Irec Reports maximum number of Irecs B 21 Irec format Reports sets output format for Irecs ASCII or binary B 22 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 23 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of Irecs that can be stored B 23 Irec per Reports sets Irec logging period B 23 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for lrecs B 24 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for srecs B 24 mb read coils Reports the current state of the MODBUS coils digital outputs B 49 mb read registers Reports the current state of the MODBUS registers analog B 49 outputs mb write coil Sets the current state of the MODBUS coil digital input B 49 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 33 menutext Displays the text of the menu item where the cursor is currently B 34 positioned mode Reports operating mode in local service or remote B 45 motor Reports motor speed B 12 no of Irec Reports sets number of Irecs stored in memory B 24 no of srec Reports sets number of srecs stored in memo
2. Register Number Variable 49 amp 50 NOT USED 51 amp 52 NOT USED 53 amp 54 NOT USED 55 amp 56 BIAS SUPPLY 57 amp 58 NOT USED 59 amp 60 NOT USED 61 amp 62 NOT USED 3 amp 64 NOT USED 65 amp 66 NOT USED 67 amp 68 EXT ALARMS 69 amp 70 02 71872 02 SENS TEMP 73874 NOT USED 75 amp 76 NOT USED 77878 NOT USED 79 amp 80 CO COR 81 amp 82 LO CO COR 83 amp 84 HI CO COR 85 amp 86 NOT USED 87 amp 88 NOT USED 89 amp 90 NOT USED lr internal 02 Sensor is installed IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered if there is conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 A Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual C 11 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Table C 3 Write Coils for 487 High Level Coil Number Action 100 NONE 101 ZERO MODE 102 SPAN MODE 103 SET BACKGROU
3. Level Contrast Level 0 0 1 5 2 10 3 15 4 20 5 25 6 30 7 35 8 40 9 45 10 50 11 55 12 60 13 65 14 70 15 75 16 80 17 85 18 90 19 95 20 100 date This command reports the current date The following example reports the date as December 1 2009 Send date Receive date 12 01 09 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to December 1 2009 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Communications Configuration B 40 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Send set date 12 01 09 Receive set date 12 01 09 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Send set default params Receive set default params ok save set save params This command stores all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The following example saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set Save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour time The following example reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14
4. cccccccecceeeeeeeeeees 6 14 Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Uescrptons 6 17 Table 6 8 Pre amp Board Connector Pin Descriptions 12011110051110011101111 6 19 Table 7 1 Model 487 High Level Replacement Hate 7 4 Table 7 2 Model 487 High Level Cables oo ccccccccccccecescetesestesestesesteseeneees 7 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components ccccceccsceseeteseeeeees 7 6 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 30 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 30 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Lonfourapon 8 10 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Lonfourapon ccc 8 11 Table 9 1 Cable Unpons ccc ccccccessscessstesesetesesessesteresessesesseseseeeeareees 9 6 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables oo ccc 9 6 Table 9 3 Mounting Options oo cccccccceccecessscesescssesessesesesseseseseeseseseseeeeees 9 7 Table B 1 Command Response Error Descriptions cccccccesesscstesesteeeteees B 3 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands ccceccececsecsessesteseeseeseseeseeestesteseesee B 3 Table B 3 Averaging Times 0 ccccceccccccecescsescetesesescesesesesceesesesceeseseetenesees B 10 Table B 4 Alarm Trigger Values 0 cccccecccccecessescetesesescetesesesteteseseenetenees B 18 Model 48 High Level Instruction
5. 5 PAZ Power Supply Optical Bench Band pass Filter Bench Heater Board Chopper Motor 8 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Measurement Interface Board Motherboard Figure 8 1 Hardware Components The optical bench is an airtight chamber that contains the sample gas The bench includes mirrors that cause the infrared light from the infrared source to pass through the sample gas multiple times before reaching the infrared detector The band pass filter limits the light entering the optical bench to a narrow band of the infrared portion of the spectrum The bench heater board applies power to the bench heater resistors and transmits the bench temperature monitored by a thermistor This assembly is used for maintaining the optical bench at a constant temperature The chopper motor spins the gas filter wheel and chopper disk at a uniform speed Thermo Fisher Scientific Optical Pickup Gas Filter Wheel Infrared Source Pre amplifier Assembly with IR Detector Sample Flow Sensor Pressure Transducer Capillary Pump Purge Flow Switch optional Firmware Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Firmware The optical pickup detects the position of the gas filter wheel provides synchronizing signals for the signal demodulation and provides a method for checking the chopper motor speed The gas filter wheel contains samples of CO and N gas that filter the radiation from the infrared s
6. Motor Speed The Motor Speed screen read only displays the status of the chopper motor A reading of 100 0 means that the motor speed is correct A reading other than 100 0 indicates that there is a problem with the chopper motor or power supply e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Motor Speed DOE RE Te DRIeIWKSIS DZ Le La Ar GC oi Cat 02 Sensor Readings The O Sensor Readings screen read only displays the measured oxygen concentration in percent and the oxygen sensor temperature in degrees C This screen is only visible if the internal O sensor option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose gt Diagnostics gt O2 Sensor Readings Chr PELIR E Ta TO pH Otto PPP LIES Ea be PLS Analog Input The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 current user Readings scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Diagnostics Menu CO gids Fi PZ Analog Input The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog Voltages voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs Pull ups are provided on all o
7. lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e lt operating status gt lt SP gt lt error status gt Each of the two lt operating status gt and lt error status gt are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 below lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function It currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e lt 0000000000 gt Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual D 5 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands D 6 Model
8. In addition each CO analog output has a span coefficient There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another For example the low CO range is set to 0 50 ppm and the high CO range is set to 0 20000 ppm By default in the dual range mode the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 5 See Table 3 3 for channels and pin connections Dual range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 78 000000000000000000 0000000000000000 000 Figure 3 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Auto Range Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 CO High Range 2 33 3 CO Low Range 3 15 5 None 4 34 7 None 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A The auto range mode switches the CO analog outputs between a high and low ranges depending on the concentration level The high and low ranges are defined in the Range menu For example suppose the low range is set to 50 ppm and the high r
9. 0 w 1 34 4209 IH 12D 909 IH sebuey men jee 129 ndino Bojeuy y y49 019Z paads 1040 apo goe 6yg 1e9 4209 07 abuey IH rep due paeds 104014 Aysueiul 20 1SB1 U0D UBA19S Dag au Bay 07 abuey 07 IO pueog d e ad Duett DOW oney jey aidwes Uongsuedueo o eut Bay 1H Sun sep fed TM abeyo seig Mou uopesu dwog Said 42090 e9 oned HS Ieu Mo ajduies ainsseiq uopesu dwog dusel Bag 0 e9 le Moly aiNssadd sdwa 6yu09 O I yoayg ueds oiaz sjnejag 129 1SN Jesey sebuey wojsng jee 129 ainssald duet youeg sabeyo sBunjes wwog 4209 e9 4209 ebuey Wales epow ebuey duet ue suojs434 wesbo1g sfuuiee Buibbojeyeq Bug e9 Bug au Bay sun se5 04 U0D 10 0e4 Saul puomssedg ERSEL suey sonsoubeiq quewnasuy uoneiquyes deen BujGereny uey nua uen uaai9g uny uaal0S S91 H9S uas dn 13M0d Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware 3 5 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed on power up of the Model 481 High Level This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are performed Thermo IEN TI Missin Run Screen The Run screen displays the current CO concentrations The status bar displays the time 24 hour format the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and optional zero span sample solenoid valve status if installed Status Bar Icons The password l
10. Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DCHP CZ CO mnt SIS R Re Daat Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 44 IP Address Netmask Default Gateway Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Address Ci piker OPER EEE i The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS O
11. Operation Service Menu tt DIE ZE Cato PS PHP L Pit Dilution Ratio The Dilution Ratio screen allows the user to view and set the dilution ratio Acceptable values are 1 500 1 The default is 1 1 When this value is set the dilution ratio is applied to all concentration measurements This screen is only accessible if the dilution ratio option is installed and when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Dilution Ratio Setup Run Screens The Setup Run Screens menu is used to define and edit up to five custom Run screens When the instrument is turned on screen 1 or zero is the default screen The Setup Run Screens menu is visible only when the instrument is in the Service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens Ee pr pn OL r PP OEE PS PPS Py AG oe ae Laa Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Service Menu Edit Bun Screen The Edit Run Screen submenu is used to edit the contents of the custom run screen This menu allows the user to edit the run screen title toggle the run screen On or Off specify the number of items to be displayed on the Run screen 1 10 and to assign a parameter to each item e Inthe Main Menu ch
12. e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Ratio A Mihei i 3 24 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Calibrate 02 The Calibrate O Background screen is used to adjust the background or Background perform a zero calibration Be sure the analyzer samples nitrogen until the readings stabilize The display shows the current O2 reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate O2 Background Calibrate 02 The Calibrate O Coefficient screen is used to adjust the O3 span Coefficient concentration while sampling span gas of known concentration The display shows the current Oz concentration reading The next line of the display is where the O2 calibration gas concentration is entered e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate O2 Coefficient Wi mld Instrument Controls The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items that may be Menu selected to control various instrument operational parameters The firmware controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions The O Compensation menu item is only displayed if the internal O sensor option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Datalogging Settings 3 26 Model 487 High Le
13. lt after it In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range Status is visible only in auto range mode This screen is only displayed if the O2 compensation option is enabled e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screen gt select a Run Screen gt select Run Screen Item gt Corrected Concentrations 3 92 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Other Measurements Analog Inputs Display Pixel Test Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Other Measurements screen is used to display a list of non concentration parameters that can be specified for the selected item number The selected item is shown by lt after it In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screen gt select a Run Screen gt select Run Screen Item gt Other Measurements The Analog Inputs screen is used to display a list of analog inputs none or analog inputs 1 8 that can be specified for the selected item number The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screen gt select a Run Screen gt select Run Screen Item gt Analog Inputs The Display Pixel Test is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that the
14. 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label AC IN Reference Designator J1 Pin w N Signal Description AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 02 J2 wo N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC PUMP J3 w N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC BENCH AMB TEMP OPT J4 J5 J6 RP WwW NO 3 wo N Bench Thermistor Ground AC HOT Bench Heater AC Control Ambient Temperature Thermistor Ground Optical Pickup Input Ground Optical Pickup Source Drive PREAMP BD 6 12 Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual mo N oOo wo A WO N Preamp Signal Input Ground for Shield Ground SPI Data Out SPI CLK SPI CS 15V 5V Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 18V for IR Source Ground 100V 100V Return MOT DRV J8 mai FP WO N Motor Drive Voltage 1 Motor Drive Voltage 2 Motor Drive Voltage 3 Motor Drive Voltage 4 PRES J9 FP WO N Chamber Pressure Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V FLOW o A O N Sample Flow Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V Ground FLOW SW wo N NC Ground Purge Flow Input 02 SENS Thermo Fisher Scientific Oo a N O o A O N D s D D D Es w N NC NC NC NC Ground 5V NC NC Ground Analog Inp
15. Application Data Unit ere C 2 EE a A ie hatte C 2 MBAP E E C 2 PC HOT Eegeregie et er C 3 WV EE C 3 TEE C 3 are Codes naks suas Ue fates See IG ada ate ge ea 2G a dell Nad C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs 2 ciecsactaticienesiedennenn C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual xiii Contents 0x05 Force Write Single EE C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported ss sssssssssssssssssssseseresrrsrsrtererereesesesee C 8 R ading a Write EE C 12 Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol ee D 1 Serial Communication Parameters s sessseesesessesesesesstseseeeesesesseseseeee D 1 TCP Communication Parameters sssssseseseseesessessresresseserseresresseserss D 2 Instrument Address saicpecche2s eer Eege Sasdevoutvvecessdasdeagnarsaciets D 2 Apbreviations lee D 2 Basic Command EEN D 2 Block Checksum Characters EE D 3 Gesyt c Commands ER D 3 Instrument Control Command ST is ciccsscceeansseeeotainccdadsvestocsbecceval D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA Commande D 7 Single Range Modei uniesie vas an An a A D 7 Dual Auto Range ET Ee D 7 Operating EE D 7 xiv Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Model 487 High Level Flow Schematic 0 0 cccccccceceteeeteee 1 3 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 0 0 ccccceccscscec
16. Capillary Figure 7 13 Cleaning or Replacing the Capillary 3 Clean with less than 0 015 inch diameter wire or replace 4 Install the capillary by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the solenoid Equipment Required Solenoid Philips screwdriver 2 Wrench 9 16 inch Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing Analog Output Testing 7 28 Analog Output Testing Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug the solenoid electrical connector from the measurement interface board 3 Remove the Teflon lines from the solenoid 4 Remove both screws holding the solenoid to the rear panel and remove the solenoid 5 Install the solenoid by following the previous steps in reverse 6 Perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Mult
17. Instrument Bulkhead Atmospheric Pressure a AN ew RA lt _ Input Gas Line Figure 2 4 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing 2 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries External Devices instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Terminal Board PCB The terminal board PCB assemblies are circuit boards with a D Sub Assemblies connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on the other side This assembly provide a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from a data system to the analyzer s I O connectors The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for iSeries instruments e HO terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O Expansion Board 1 0 Terminal Board Figure 2 5 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 1 i
18. To install the digital output board follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 15 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 34 Remove the digital output board See Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 36 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement Measurement Interface Board Replacement 7 38 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 5 Using the nut driver remove the six standoffs securing the board to the rear panel 6 Pop the motherboard off of the support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 17 Equipment Required Measurement inter
19. 32 NOT USED 33 NOT USED 34 EXT ALARM 1 35 EXT ALARM 2 36 EXT ALARM 3 In addition to the coils listed in the Read Coils table coils in the Write Coils table can also be read Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 10 Model Ap High Level Instruction Manual IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument A Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in this appendix A Table C 2 Read Registers for 48i High Level Register Number Variable 0 NONE 1 amp 2 CO 384 LO CO 5 amp 6 HI CO 7 amp 8 RANGE STATUS 9 amp 10 S R 11 amp 12 LO S R 13814 HI S R 15 amp 16 INT TEMP 17 amp 18 BENCH TEMP 19 amp 20 NOT USED 21 amp 22 NOT USED 23824 NOT USED 25826 PRESSURE 27 amp 28 SAMPLE FLOW 29830 INTENSITY 31832 MOTOR SPEED 33834 ANALOG IN 1 35836 ANALOG IN 2 37838 ANALOG IN 3 39840 ANALOG IN 4 41 amp 42 ANALOG IN 5 43844 ANALOG IN 6 45846 ANALOG IN 7 47848 ANALOG IN 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported
20. Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition HERE 7 8 Figure 7 4 Replacing the Fan 7 11 Figure 7 5 Replacing the IR Source 7 12 Figure 7 6 Removing the Motor 7 13 Figure 7 7 Replacing the Optical Bench oo cece estes teteeteeeteeeeeeeee 7 16 Figure 7 8 Replacing the Optical Switch Inverted View 7 17 Figure 7 9 Replacing the Detector Preamplifier Assembly cccceceeee 7 19 Figure 7 10 Replacing the Humpe 7 21 Figure 7 11 Replacing the Pressure Transdurer 7 22 Figure 7 12 Replacing the Flow Transducer 7 25 Figure 7 13 Cleaning or Replacing the Capillary cc cccececeteeeteeee 7 27 Figure 7 14 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pms 7 29 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual xv Figures xvi Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Figure 7 15 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 2 1511115111121 7 35 Figure 7 16 Rear Panel Board Lonnectors 7 35 Figure 7 17 Replacing the Measurement Interface Doan 7 39 Figure 7 18 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 40 Figure 8 1 Hardware Components ccccccsccscsssscesestesestesestesesteseseseseseaveees 8 2 Figure 9 1 Flow Diagram Internal Oz Sensor 9 2 Figure 9 2 Purge Housing Assembly uu cece ce cesesescsescetesesesteesesesteenens 9 4 Figure 9 3 Rack Mount Option Assembly 0 cccccccsceccscesesceesteseeteseeteseeseees 9 8 Figure 9 4 Bench Mountmg ccc cc cccecesesc
21. GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C Link command A 3 60 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Timezone DIE Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The Menu l i analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed The O2 Sensor Readings screen is only displayed if the internal O2 sensor option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Program Versions The Program Versions screen read only shows the version number of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Program Versions Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Diagnostics Menu Mettet Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board is only displayed if the I
22. PUM EE 8 3 Purge Flow Switch optional sssssesssssseeesesesrsssrsrsrsrsrsesrsrsrsesesesesee 8 3 te 8 3 Wrist terreno EE 8 4 Monitoring Signals sssrinin euer 8 4 Output EENEG ce eautanhveionsmnese aan ictamatvoubbanabebentons 8 4 Election ecg eRe yy eege ege 8 5 e KEE 8 5 Measurement Interface Board 20st ages reais ee 8 6 Measurement Interface Board Connectors 8 6 PLOW Sensor EE 8 6 Pressure Sensor Assembly iaistcscdshexssateguavendidessadesdecvadeansy noviueneatsaesae 8 6 Bench Heater Beer 8 7 Pre amp Ereegnes EE 8 7 Digital KEEN 8 7 I O Expansion Board E 8 7 Front Panel Connector Boat iseiszeccisnccsatesi sensi SkugeEE Eege 8 7 WONG OM E 8 8 Analog elauter 8 8 Analog Current Outputs Optional 3 00 eianceas eens 8 8 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional isc cienclassadesviacandiaessenesctncateassses 8 9 Digital Relay Outputs scjiisi insti aaotiacncwcveilareiees deed 8 9 RTE 8 9 ER deel enes 8 10 EE a 8 10 EE 8 11 re 8 11 External Accessory Eege egener 8 11 Optional Eoutpmemt seen 9 1 Internal Zero Ereegnes 9 1 Internal Oxygen O2 Sensor aics cits eueiitetneici Eegerd deg 9 1 Internal Oz Sensor Calibrations eg Seeerei teenies 9 2 Alternate Sensor Calibration cciciestacssiewaretendiastindatinccatee 9 3 Internal Zero Air Scrubbers eer dee ee ee 9 4 Filter Wheel Puree scat cue ies ns Eege 9 4 EE 9 5 Teflon Particulate Ee eege eet 9 5 I O Expansion Board Assembly sisccsccctdivescsscstuecescitascpderapczeaiceedevtenzecex 9 5
23. Preamp Board Calibration is nccasaiiididaniehiaeendiicidets 3 84 Temperature Calibration c ci cateties alten ned neranee ee caheshae ae 3 85 Analog Output Calibration i24 cesa sawiadcnatenctieddnens 3 85 Analog Output Calibrate Zeros ccc carat ie eisai 3 86 Analog Output Calibrate Bulle Scale zcacd cobe cs iclecceseateressseeceetaacece 3 86 Analog Input Calibrations nenii nde 3 87 Analog Input Calibrate Z err cased scnsudt tants Geteste 3 87 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale sec cwseisisagesentasstiecteveescteeaeeees 3 88 O Correction Concentration 3 88 EE Ee 3 89 Set p Rum Screens ee EES er 3 89 Edit R n EE ergett Ehe Sien 3 90 Edit Tile E 3 90 Elle eet Ebert 3 90 N mberof tems a Saanets sd shattenmd Ric A 3 91 Select Run Screen Item ee enee 3 91 E ET EE 3 92 Corrected Concentrations eegen 3 92 Other Measurements EE 3 93 Analog Inputs oj iccccienciineniiediuedntliasntewn dined 3 93 Display Pinel Test Aert Zeenen deet eene 3 93 Rest re RER EE 3 94 E BEE 3 94 Et ACSW E 3 95 oeh Inst rite iit vis cassie ee 3 95 Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation 3 95 Change Password Seed 3 96 Remove Password E 3 96 Mil Gch Instrument EC 3 96 Chapter 4 Calibration eege dee 4 1 et ee E 4 CO Concentration Standard EE 4 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual ix Contents EECHER 4 COMPLESSION EE 4 2 IR 4 2 Seri o DAT at aE EE 4 2 Flow Meter s and Controller s ssseesseseessssssesss
24. Replacement Parts List 7 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Ze 4 T Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 3 Dress gt BR toreturn to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 487 High Level major subassemblies Refer to Table 7 2 to identify the component location Table 7 1 Model 48i High Level Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 101491 11 Processor Board 100533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board optional 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Part Number Description 102496 00 Front Panel Display 101399 00 Transformer 220 240VAC optional 101863 00 Transformer 100VAC optional
25. To replace the pump see Pump Replacement on page 7 20 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Loosen the fittings and remove both lines going to the pump Remove the four screws from the top plate remove top plate flapper valve and the bottom plate Remove the screw securing the diaphragm to piston and remove diaphragm Assemble the pump by following the previous steps in reverse make sure the Teflon white side of the diaphragm is facing up and that the flapper valves cover the holes of the top and bottom plate Perform the Leak Test and Pump Check Out on page 5 4 Top Plate Flapper Plate Bottom Plate Diaphragm Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the Pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 5 9 Safety Precautions Troubleshooting Thermo Fisher Scientific Guides Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems For additional fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual The service mode in the Operation chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing
26. as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT
27. problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Locations on page 6 20 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 1 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 5 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 7 e Service Locations on page 6 20 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Table 6 2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction Does not start the light on display does not come on and the pump motor is not running Possible Cause No power
28. selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output Note The settings are different depending on the AUTO MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings Changing either of these settings will produce a different set of analog output data items If either of these modes is going to be changed on a regular basis then the user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting A Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Select Range The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V Possible ranges for the current outputs are 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Select Range EN EUH Eek Bene Minimum and Maximum The Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero 0 Value and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 6 for a list of choices In dual or autorange mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range Status is visible onl
29. that can be used with this analyzer Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Gesytec Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert DANGER WARNING CAUTION Equipment Damage GG Description A hazard is pre
30. y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec format format command These commands return a snapshot of the main operating conditions measurements and status at the time the command is issued The following example shows a typical response The format is defined within the command in the case of erxy or by the current settings of the format and erec format commands in the case of erec For details on erec formatting see the Record Layout Definition section at the end of this appendix For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send erec Receive erec 09 48 04 06 05 flags 9C040510 CO 0 000 4 loCO 0 002 4 s r 0 000 los r 0 902 biasv 112 668 agci 96 500 intt 34 023 cht 47 995 smpfl 0 000 pres 0 000 avgt1 10 avgt2 10 CObkg 0 000 COcoef 1 000 loCOcoef 1 000 COrange 10000000 000 loCOrange 10000000 000 motor 100 000 lrec srec lrec rec num srec rec num lexy rec num sexy rec num lrec aa bb 00 pp qq yy srec aa bb 00 pp qq yy rec The starting record index number 1 most recent num The number of records to return 1 to 10 x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set lrec srec format format command aa hours 01 to 23 bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year These commands output Irec or srec logged data The output format is determined by th
31. 1 ok Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Ignore default 1 Accept power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting to either 0 local unlocked or 1 remote locked according to Table B 11 The default value is 0 power up in local unlocked mode The following example shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote locked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 set power up mode value This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the local unlocked mode value 0 or the remote locked mode value 1 according to Table B 11 If the instrument is set to power up in the local remote mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to power up in the remote locked mode changes can not be made from the front panel The following example sets the instrument to power up in P g P P D remote locked mode Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values Value Power up Mode 0 Local Unlocked Mode default 1 Remote Locked Mode program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number Send program no Receive program no iSeries 48iHL 01 02 12 095 set layout ack This command reports the st
32. 100 Degrees C Everything Else 0 Units 10 Units The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices Group choices are Concentrations Corrected Concentrations if the Oz compensation option is enabled Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed This allows the user to select the output signal to the selected output channel In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range Status is visible only in auto range mode The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 7 below for a list of items for each signal group choice Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Choose Signal To Output ERE DRIeIWKSIS T KAS Lo Af CO mid a pri ir Bs ETE EE Sanat Bone OEH Otxta Table 3 7 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Corrected Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs None None None None CO single auto range CO COR single auto range Sample Reference Analog Input 1 if the 1 0 only only expansion board is installed LO CO dual range only LO CO COR dual range only LO Sample Reference Analog Input 2 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed HI CO dual range only HI CO
33. 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour time The following example sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set addr dns address This command sets the domain name server address where address consists GR of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive addr gw 192 168 1 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of GE four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr gw 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 192 168 1 200 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four GR num
34. 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document lt CR gt is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Gesytec command lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt Each command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or lt CR gt If a command is terminated with lt ETXs gt then two additional characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt This is the block checksum Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt may be added to the command to prevent processing invalid commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt Gesytec Commands Instrument Control Command Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator det
35. 25 Pin Terminal Board EE 9 5 Terminal Block and Cable Kits ij sjecsevassdcs iaivacevnunsectedasaveadedacsntentanens 9 5 Eeer te 9 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Mo nting E 9 7 EI eA IN EEN A 1 C Link Protocol Commands sscccssecsessessesseseeseesessesteaeeaeeneeneseeaeeneeneenes B 1 Instrument Identification luet ysccccicsssacecsdsves soctvscensstsvetbasslvaneeuivies B 1 Eelere genee eege ee B 2 Entering Units in PPB eege ennienni ieie B 3 Convert Concentration Formats sde dd B 3 Commands E E B 3 Measurements ege eege EES Ee AE ENEE B 10 EE B 14 TE B 18 ee Eege Late eeh B 19 EE EE EE B 26 ER EE B 33 Measurement Configuration ee g iegeh dead ddalntadadetetiics B 35 Hardware EE B 38 Communications Eiere B 40 EE B 48 Record Layout Definition eieiei Eege B 53 Format Specifier for ASCII Responses B 54 Format Specifier for Binary Responses sssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees B 54 Format Specifier for Erec Layout iaj ac cisuecetvatssntessttentincderieeeeee B 54 SE B 55 Value SINE eB sec el ce OE BE acta uae Gis B 55 EE B 55 Alariny Information Ee e Ee B 55 Translation EE B 56 Selection ale eene eeh Aen B 56 E EE B 56 EAT OSes ees a tae ached ata ah tal tha eels gare stata ey B 57 MODBUS Protocol EN C 1 Serial Communication Parameters 22 sciasatiediwiiinn asin ceeea ies C 1 TCP Communication Parameters seats cics i axccadan Ganctassetecctertcenns aloes C 2
36. 48 High Level Instruction Manual The Gesytec serial number defaults to zero To set the Gesytec serial number select Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Gesytec serial number set to 000 The Gesytec serial number is bold in the example Gesytec Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt OO000000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt t T t Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt O000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP ck t t Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Gesytec serial number set to 123 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MD03 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 1230000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt t T t Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 12 3 0000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T t t Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 12300
37. 487 High Level Instruction Manual The Coefficients screen allows the user to view and re calculate the calibration coefficients e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Cal gt select Cal Point gt Coefficients The Default Coefficients screen allows the user to view and reset the calibration coefficients to default values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Cal gt select Cal Point gt Default Coefficients The Pre amp Board Calibration screen is used to adjust the preamp board calibration parameters The preamp board calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Thermo Fisher Scientific Temperature Calibration Analog Output Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Preamp Calibration DEI CHET pyro erha Lo A CH eo bet Rri Gs ie EE The Temperature Calibration screen allows the user to view and set the ambient temperature sensor offset which basically adjusts the temperature sensor so that it reads correctly The temperature calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should
38. B 16 temp max alarm internal Reports sets internal temperature alarm minimum value B 16 temp min alarm motor speed Reports sets motor speed alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm motor speed Reports sets motor speed alarm minimum value B 16 min alarm pressure Reports sets pressure alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm pressure Reports sets pressure alarm minimum value B 16 min alarm sample flow _Reports sets sample flow alarm maximum value B 17 max alarm sample flow _Reports sets sample flow alarm minimum value B 17 min alarm trig conc Reports sets current CO concentration alarm trigger sense B 17 alarm trigconc 02 Reports sets current 0z concentration alarm warning value B 18 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page allow mode cmd Reports sets whether set mode locks instrument front panel B 45 analog iout range Reports sets analog current output range per channel B 48 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 48 analog vout range Reports sets analog voltage output range per channel B 49 avg time Reports sets averaging time B 10 baud Reports sets current baud rate B 42 bias voltage Reports current IR bias supply voltage B 18 bkg 02 Reports sets current 0z background B 29 cal bkg 02 Sets auto calibrates 0 background B 27 cal co bkg Sets
39. B 19 e Calibration on page B 26 e Keys Display on page B 33 e Measurement Configuration on page B 35 e Hardware Configuration on page B 38 e Communications Configuration on page B 40 e I O Configuration on page B 47 e Record Layout Definition on page B 53 Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent to the instrument s identification number plus 128 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Bi C Link Protocol Commands Commands Commands B 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual For example if the instrument ID is set to 48 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 176 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters via remote However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercase characters
40. Bee Pi The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Corrected Concentrations if the O2 compensation option is enabled Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Concentrations Corrected Concentrations 3 30 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below Range status is visible only in auto range mode O2 is visible only if the O compensation option is enable e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Concentrations CO gies Piim ERE i The Corrected Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are pro
41. Configuration Select Channel 3 49 Allow Over Under Range s itesescctecicdi detesateaveeuttlactsionaetiineee 3 50 Analog Output Configuration Select Action 3 50 Select Ratiee niner ia adda eee 3 51 Minimum and Maximum Value enee ees 3 51 Choose Egeter ee 3 52 Analog Input Conte nran Onaga sacs ce etch eee 3 54 Eeer 3 54 Unitas Eege 3 55 Decimal Places ii Ses egener ee ee eeben 3 55 Number of Table Points EE 3 55 Be ic Foul EE 3 56 Eeer 3 56 User Value siesena er EE EEEa iiaa 3 57 Temperature E EE 3 57 Pressure ee 3 57 OF COmi pensation Eed 3 58 KREE 3 59 ET 3 59 E EE 3 60 BR 3 60 eeh 3 61 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual vii Contents viii Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Programi WEEN deeg 3 61 Voltages EE 3 62 Motherboard E 3 62 Interface Board Voltages 2 acveisatiesctestesteseiinactsitertasteesdaseioase 3 62 WO Board EE 3 63 EREECHEN Eug 3 63 Pressure siipien nina iiai aoe ii e iiaea 3 63 FOW E 3 64 Sample Reference Ratio 2 eeiegretg eeget tee EEN 3 64 et E 3 64 E re inann elon aa age ella aR AA hE 3 65 Oy Sensor EE 3 65 EE 3 65 Analog Input Voltages i2usdee iscsi deride 3 66 Digital Inp ts lesaucs rosea sets aoa acage hse acne clei a ea cat ad 3 66 Relay tagged geg ee tans tatvsnectbergines 3 66 Eet KEE Ee 3 67 eege 3 67 e EE 3 67 Contact Information seisein rediri ankea iga 3 68 Alarms E 3 68 Internal Temperature ee een een Eege 3 69 Min and Max Internal Te
42. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards 1993 Available from www NTIS gov PB94130424 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 4 9 Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be D P P performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This includes the sample pump solenoid valves and IR source which have a limited life Other operations such as cleaning the optics and checking the calibration of the pressure and temperature transducers should be performed on a regular basis This chapter includes the following maintenance information and replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Replacement Parts on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Optics on page 5 2 e IR Source Replacement on page 5 3 e Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 3 e Leak Test and Pump Check Out on page 5 4 e Pump Rebuilding on page 5 5 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment
43. Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the following example begins with the ASCII character code 176 decimal which directs the command to the Model 487 High Level and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an argument Command responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command set unit ppm instead of the correct command set gas unit ppm Send set unit ppm Receive set unit ppm bad cmd Thermo Fisher Scientific Entering Units in PPB Convert Concentration Formats Commands List Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Table B 1 Command Response Error Descriptions Command Response Description bad cmd Command is not recognized too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit too lo
44. High Level has the following features 320 x 240 graphics display Menu driven firmware Field programmable ranges User selectable single dual auto range modes Multiple user defined analog outputs Analog input options High sensitivity Fast response time Linearity through all ranges Highly specific to CO Self aligning optics Automatic temperature and pressure compensation User selectable digital input output capabilities Standard communications features include RS232 485 and Ethernet C Link MODBUS Gesytec Bayern Hessen streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics Principle of Operation on page 1 2 Specifications on page 1 3 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this CO analyzer We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer For more information on servicing see the Servicing chapter starting on page 7 1 Principle Of The Model 48 High Level operates on the principle that carbon monoxide CO absorbs infrared radiation at a wavelen
45. Inthe Main Menu choose Averaging Time The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors which are used to correct the CO readings that the instrument generates using its own internal calibration data The screens below show the calibration factors menu in single mode and dual auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words LO and HI to indicate which range is displayed The O2 Background menu item and the O2 Coefficient menu item are displayed only when the internal O2 sensor option is installed Normally the calibration factors are calculated automatically using the functions described in Calibration Menu later in this chapter However the calibration factors can also be set manually using the functions in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Factors Menu CO Background The CO background correction is determined during zero calibration The CO background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer while sampling zero air Before the analyzer sets the CO reading to zero it stores this value as the CO background correction The CO Background screen is used to perform a manual zero calibration of the instrument As such the instrument should sample zero air until stable readings are obtained The first line of the display shows the current CO reading This reading is the CO background signal The second lin
46. Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging prek pruni OL r TTC CO mid Pp PLES ited Ar Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the selected record format srec or Irec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Logging Period Min DOE RE Pur CH bo bet ET Tel kees Di kal L An Get TA Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type lrecs or srecs Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records and changing the percent allocated to one record type will automatically change the other e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data tre
47. Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Cal screen displays Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press E Tra scroll to a channel and la 3 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press e The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 5 Press gt to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 14 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Ambient Temperature Thermo Fisher Scienti
48. Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt select a Run Screen gt Number of Items Ai CG RRS E Select Run Screen ltem The Select Run Screen Item screen is used to assign a selected parameter to a position in the Run screen display list Choices are Concentrations Corrected Concentrations if the O2 compensation option is enabled Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed Item 1 is displayed at the top of the list If None is selected the associated item will not be displayed on the Run screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt select a Run Screen gt Item 1 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 91 Operation Service Menu Concentrations The Concentrations screen is used to display a list of concentration parameters that can be specified for the selected item number The selected item is shown by lt after it In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range Status is visible only in auto range mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screen gt select a Run Screen gt select Run Screen Item gt Concentrations Corrected Concentrations The Corrected Concentrations screen is used to display a list of corrected concentration parameters that can be specified for the selected item number The selected item is shown by
49. Out Cal The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal menu press A ro scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press ail 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press e The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale a 5 Use J until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value 6 Press a to return to the previous screen 7 Press T to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Usel until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 32 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 1 From the
50. The following example sets the O2 concentration alarm maximum value to 100 00 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Send set alarm conc oi max 100 Receive set alarm conc 02 max 100 ok alarm internal temp min alarm internal temp max These commands report the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the internal temperature alarm minimum value is 15 0 C Send alarm internal temp min Receive alarm internal temp min 15 0 deg C set alarm internal temp min value set alarm internal temp max value These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 45 0 C Send set alarm internal temp max 45 Receive set alarm internal temp max 45 ok alarm motor speed min alarm motor speed max These commands report the motor speed alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the motor speed alarm minimum value is 99 8 Send alarm motor speed min Receive alarm motor speed min 99 8 set alarm motor speed min value set alarm motor speed max value These commands set the motor speed alarm minimum and maximum values to value where val
51. and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Cables Cables 9 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Six feet Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 2
52. auto calibrates CO background B 26 cal co coef Sets auto calibrates CO coefficient B 27 cal coef 02 Sets auto calibrates 0z coefficient B 27 cal high co coef Sets auto calibrates high range CO coefficient B 27 cal low co coef Sets auto calibrates low range CO coefficient B 27 calibrate Sets CO coefficient B 27 chamber temp Reports optical bench temperature B 12 clr Irecs Clears away only lrecs that have been saved B 19 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 19 clr srecs Clears away only srecs that have been saved B 19 co Reports current CO concentration B 11 co bkg Reports sets current CO background B 29 co coef Reports sets current CO coefficient B 27 coef 0 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from hi multi point B 28 calibration coef 1 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from hi multi point B 28 calibration coef 2 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from hi multi point B 28 calibration coef 02 Reports sets current 0 coefficient B 28 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 38 copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 25 copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 24 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 24 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 24 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 25 Model
53. channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 14 The following example reports that analog voltage output channel 2 is set to 3 1 10 V Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 14 The following example sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 14 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1 V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined mb read coils start count start index of first coil count number of coils to report This command reports the current state of the MODBUS coils digital outputs Output is in binary format with the coil start appearing as the right most bit Send mb read coils 1 15 Receive mb read coils 1 15 000000100000001 mb read registers start count start index of first register must be odd number count number of registers to report must be even each pair of registers is reported as a float This command reports the current state of the MODBUS registers analog outputs Output is in floating point format with the pair of registers start and start 1 appearing as the left most value Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 49 C Lin
54. components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following the previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing LCD Module Replacement LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 rn Retaining Screws 2 Front Panel Board Ribbon Cables 3 i i Figure 7 18 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Bottom Support LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 18 Replacement Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash immediately using soap and water A amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD pola
55. control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground Ethernet Connection An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol External Accessory The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 48 High Level Connector analyzer This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 8 11 Internal Zero Span Assembly Internal Oxygen Thermo Fisher Scientific 02 Sensor Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 487 High Level is available with the following options e Internal Zero Span Assembly on page 9 1 e Internal Oxygen O2 Sensor on page 9 1 e Internal Zero Air Scrubber on page 9 4 e Filter Wheel Purge on page 9 4 e Teflon Particulate Filter on page 9 5 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 5 e Terminal Bl
56. gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings menu External alarms can also be logged streamed or output as a digital output by choosing EXT ALARMS from the Other Measurements list e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt External Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Service Menu Service Menu The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode When service mode is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the service mode choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode in the Main Menu Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode In dual or auto range modes HI or LO multi point calibration is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low concentrations The O2 Correction Concentration menu item is only displayed if the O2 correction option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Range Mode Select The Range Mode Select screen is used to switch between the various range modes Single Dual and Auto Range The range mode select screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Range Mode Select 3 78 Model
57. hee TEEN EE i PME bee EEN EE The Model 482 High Level utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen is the normal operating screen It displays the CO concentration depending on operating mode From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing RL The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each submenu contains related instrument settings This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview juawinsysuy yOo Un piomssed 3A0WY piomsseg abueyd juauinijsu 4907 psomssed 19S snieis pg O I STEI pg Ul out 98 u09 Byuog puawnysul Ajuo afueu ony 10 jeng 104 Jeen ynejyaq a10 say SMEIS OI sindyno Boyeuy Ise sal 1 X d Aejdsiq au09 0 sajes Aejoy suaaiog uny dp 13S ou09 sindy Ieufg 4209 oe oney von lesoiny uedS saGeyo indul Bojeuy 6yg 0 e9 39u09 u0 931109 O leony 019Z sHuipeay 1mdut Bojeuy 909 071 18D SUngiaO 129 joen 3S4 1e9 Indul Gojeuy y9949 ueds sBulpeay 1osu
58. index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp field index The following example reports the list of analog outputs index numbers and variables Send Receive list var aout list var aout index variable O none 1 CO 5 sr 8 intt 9 cht 10 auxt 13 pres 14 smplfl 15 intensity 16 speed 28 biasv relay stat This command reports the current relay logic as normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The following example shows that the status of all the relays logic is set to normally open Thermo Fisher Scientific Record Layout Thermo Fisher Scientific Definition C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Send relay stat Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 1
59. inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 5 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on the motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out from each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e Zero Gas Mode e Span Gas Mode e Set Background e Calibrate to low range span concentration e Calibrate to high range span concentration e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale e External Alarms The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in firmware Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components Serial Ports RS 232 Connection 8 10 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers
60. instrument at atmospheric pressure It may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement as shown in Figure 2 4 if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure A 2 Connect the EXHAUST bulkhead to a suitable vent The exhaust line should be 1 4 inch OD with a minimum ID of 1 8 inch The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet Verify that there is no restriction in this line 3 Ifthe optional zero span solenoid valves are installed connect a source of CO free air to the ZERO bulkhead and connect a source of CO span gas to the SPAN bulkhead 4 Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector For detailed information about connecting to the instrument refer to Connecting External Devices on page 2 5 Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration on page 3 45 External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Setup Procedure Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 5 For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection refer to Analog Output Testing on page 7 28 5 Plug the instrument into an outlet of the appropriate voltage and frequency A N WARNING The Model 487 High Level is supplied with a three wire grounding cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Figure 2 3 Model 48i High Level Rear Panel lt Vent to Exhaust Line at
61. internal air scrubber is mounted inside the instrument and provides a P S cru bb er source of zero air Filter Wheel Purge The filter wheel purge option includes a housing attached between the optical bench and the motor plate Error Reference source not found It surrounds the gas correlation wheel and allows purging the area around the gas correlation wheel with a gas other than that present in the local atmosphere This option increases reliability in the presence of contaminants that could interfere with the analytical process Motor Plate Purge Wheel Housing Figure 9 2 Purge Housing Assembly 9 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Note Teflon Particulate Filter 1 0 Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly Terminal Block and Thermo Fisher Scientific Cable Kits Optional Equipment Teflon Particulate Filter The stability of the purge gas is very important Since this gas is in the same optical path as the sample changes in the composition of the purge gas can change the calibration of the instrument Therefore either zero air or a non toxic dry inert gas such as nitrogen is recommended for use in this option Other than the effect of the purge gas operation and calibration of the instrument is not affected by the addition of the purge housing A constant purge flow of approximately 140cc min is recommended for optimum pe
62. may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e MODBUS Slave e Gesytec Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer data logger or PC A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components RS 485 Connection The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow
63. on then both temperature readings are the same If temperature compensation is off a temperature of 30 C is used as the default temperature even though the actual internal temperature is 27 2 C The following example shows that temperature compensation is on and that the internal temperature is 27 2 C Send internal temp Receive internal temp 27 2 deg C motor This command reports the current motor speed The following example reports that the current motor speed is 100 Send motor Receive motor 100 o2 temp This command reports the current oxygen sensor temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the O2 sensor temperature is 31 C Send o2 temp Receive o2 temp 31 0 deg C pres This command reports the current reaction chamber pressure The first pressure reading is the pressure reading being used in instrument calculations The second pressure is the actual pressure reading being measured If pressure compensation is on then both pressure readings are the same If pressure compensation is off a pressure of 760 mmHg is used as default pressure even though the actual pressure is 753 4 mmHg The following example shows that the actual reaction chamber pressure is 753 4 mmHg Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Send pres Receive pres 753 4 mmHg ratio high ratio low ratio The ratio command reports the sample reference ratio in
64. only be performed by an instrument service technician A Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels for calibration Current channels are visible only if the I O expansion board is installed The analog output calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal Mettet DEA TT Or OO Ota a Libri ML riii Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter for a voltage channel or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range See the set output to field on the display e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero 5 EH vided Fi PERRET Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale scree
65. sample reference is between 0 90 and 1 20 Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Initial S R Ratio 3 82 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu CO mri r PAS Multi Point Up to three gas concentrations cal points for each range may be calibrated Calibration to using the following steps Three cal points will give the most accurate readings over the entire range The calibration process is sequential and will work properly if all steps are followed in order The following example shows the multi point calibration screen in single range mode In dual or auto range modes HI or LO is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low concentrations and function the same way Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Calibration CO mri Calibrate Point 1 2 3 The Calibrate Point 1 screen allows the user to view and set the selected calibration point The calibrate 2 and calibrate 3 screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Cal gt Calibrate 1 2 or 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 83 Operation Service Menu Coefficients Default Coefficients Preamp Board Calibration 3 84 Model
66. see Setup Run Screens on page 3 89 Instrument Readings Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Range Menu Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration appears above the main menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode CC DH D D see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to select a choice e Dress to return to the Main Menu or E to return to the Run screen Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units CO ranges and to set the custom ranges The screens below show the range menu in single range mode and dual auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed For more information about the single dual and auto range modes see Single Range Mode Dual Range Mode and Auto Range Mode below e Inthe Main Menu choose Range 3 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu Single Range Mode In the single range mode there is one range one averaging time and one span coefficient By defau
67. set mode remote commands according to Table B 10 The default value is 0 ignore the commands The following example shows that the instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd o set allow mode cmd value This command is used to configure the instrument to value where value is either 1 accept or 0 ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands according to Table B 10 If the instrument is set to accept the commands value 1 the set mode local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to ignore the commands value 0 the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 46 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual upon but it will not change the instrument lock status this is for compatibility with systems expecting and ok response Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote regardless of the above setting A The following example sets the instrument to accept the set mode local and set mode remote commands Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd
68. should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual Installing the Model 487 High Level includes the following recommendations and procedures e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 1 e Setup Procedure on page 2 3 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 5 e Startup on page 2 9 When lifting the instrument use procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A The Model 482 High Level is shipped complete in one container If there is obvious damage to the shipping container when you receive the instrument notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from the shipping container and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Unpacking and Inspecti
69. steps in reverse 7 16 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Bench Heater Assembly Replacement 5 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Heater Figure 7 8 Replacing the Optical Switch Inverted View Bench Heater Use the following procedure to replace the bench heater assembly Figure 8 Assembly Replacement iiser Required Bench heater Heat conductive compound Flatblade screwdriver 1 4 inch f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the optical bench following the Optical Bench Replacement procedure in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Detector Preamplifier Assembly Replacement Detector Preamplifier Assembly Replacement A 7 18 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual 3 Remove the two screws holding each heater to the bottom of the optical bench and remove both heaters and the heater board assembly 4 Apply heat conductive compound to the bottom of the heaters and install the new heaters and heater board assembly 5 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manu
70. the Servicing chapter A Use the following procedure to clean the mirrors 1 Turn off power and disconnect power line 2 Remove the field mirror by removing the four Allen head screws holding it to the main bench use a 9 64 inch Allen wrench Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance IR Source Replacement 3 Carefully clean each mirror using a cotton swab and methanol Rinse with distilled or deionized water Dry by blowing clean dry air over the mirror 4 Reassemble following the above procedure in reverse It is not necessary to realign any mirror following cleaning 5 Calibrate the instrument See the Calibration chapter in this manual IR Source The IR source control system has been designed to operate the wire wound R epl acement resistor IR source conservatively in order to increase its life Nevertheless the IR source does have a finite life Since the IR source is relatively inexpensive and easily replaced it is recommended that the IR source be replaced after one year of continuous use This will prevent loss of data due to IR source failure If an IR source is to be replaced on an as needed basis it should be replaced when e There is no light output e After cleaning the optics the IR light intensities remain below 100 000 Hz It is not necessary to recalibrate the Model 487 High Level after replacing the IR source since it is a ratio instrument and replacing the IR source does not affec
71. the following procedure if the standard calibration procedure described previously fails to calibrate properly or for high altitude 5000m 15400 ft calibration 1 Supply the nitrogen zero gas to the SAMPLE port on the rear of the analyzer 2 From the Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt O2 Background set the O2 background to zero and press to set the O2 background 3 Use the screwdriver to adjust zero potentiometer RV1 such that the O2 value reads 0 00 On 4 Use the screwdriver to adjust the span potentiometer RV2 fully clockwise 5 Supply the O2 span gas to the SAMPLE port on the rear of the analyzer 6 From the Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt O2 Coefficient set the O2 coefficient to 1 000 and press to set the Oz coefficient 7 Use the screwdriver to adjust the coarse span potentiometer RV3 such that the O2 reading is 20 greater than the calibration gas value For example 25 O span gas should be set to produce an output of 30 00 On Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Internal Zero Air Scrubber 8 Use the screwdriver to adjust the Span potentiometer RV2 such that the Oz reading indicates the correct percent concentration For example 25 oxygen span gas should be set to produce a measurement of 25 00 9 Replace the cover wait 30 minutes for the instrument to stabilize and repeat the four steps in the Calibration procedure Inte rnal Ze ro Air The
72. 0 Correction Concentration 3 88 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual ERED Pi Taal tH Ob IRNIeIWKSIS Ehe EEE The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel The O Correction Concentration screen is used to set the oxygen correction concentration Acceptable values range from 0 to 20 9 When O2 compensation is enabled the following equation is applied to all of the concentration values to generate corrected values CO COR The corrected values may be output on the analog outputs stored in logging memory or output as streaming data The corrected values are not displayed on the Run screen on the front panel only the non corrected values 20 9 OD 20 9 J O2 miea Abbreviations C is the measured concentration O2 is the oxygen concentration that C is corrected to this value is set by the user in the SERVICE gt O2 CORRECTION CONC menu and defaults to 15 O2 meas is the measured O2 concentration which is clamped at 20 8 to prevent divide by zero errors Comp is the corrected concentration CO COR that may be used for analog outputs or datalogging ege O2 en C e Inthe Main Menu choose gt Instrument Controls gt O2 Correction Conc Thermo Fisher Scientific
73. 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration DEM Les ria LJ Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state or instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings EH Guide iL i Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action e Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed 88 8 P DEM Dk ria LJ CO vided PLP 3 46 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument s
74. 00 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available The analyzer s default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide backwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Baud Rate Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Data Bits Parity Stop Bits 3 36 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7 or 8 default In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Data Bits CO vided PLP The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None default Even or Odd In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Parity DH pikari Piim EE i The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial port to 1 default or 2 In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Stop Bits Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EIR PE ELPA A a E L mie AG Wi mid Pin Piri RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for seria
75. 00000 lt SP gt lt CR gt Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements reported in response to DA command Single Range Mode Dual Auto Range Mode Operating and Error Status Thermo Fisher Scientific Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands The following measurements reported in response to DA command are for the Model 487 High Level The 1 measurement reported in single range mode includes e CO The 2 measurements reported in dual or auto range modes include e lowCO e high CO See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Model 487 High Level Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 487 High Level D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On Maintenance Local Zero Gas On Span Gas On Gas Unit Indication ppm OR ppb Ozonator Off PMT Off Not Used E O S o o o oO COOC TO OCH gt l OG Ga eaea l a aa wk oO o o oy oyoy o oj ojo COOC CH COOC CH COOC COOC CH COOC OO COOC CH ess la la NaNe O Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual D 7 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands Table D 2 Error Status for Model 487 High Level D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3
76. 1 Signal Description Relay1_ContactA Screw Figure 2 6 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 2 Detail B Signal Description Relay7_ContactA Relay1_ContactB Relay7_ContactB Relay2_ContactA Relay8_ContactA Relay2_ContactB Relay8_ContactB Relay3_ContactA Relay9_ContactA Relay3_ContactB Relay9_ContactB Relay4_ContactA Relay10_ContactA Relay4_ContactB Relay10_ContactB O Jo INIo anys Pl wt pr Relay5_ContactA Relay5_ContactB Relay6_ContactA Solenoid_Drive_Output1 24V Solenoid_Drive_Output2 Relay6_ContactB 24V Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Connecting External Devices 25 Pin Terminal Board The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board See Detail A 2 See Detail B Assembled Connector Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Detail A Table 2 3 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail B Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 lOut1 13 Analog_In1 2 GND_ISO 14 Analog In 3 lOut2 15 Analog In 4 GND_ISO 16 GNDD 5 lOut3 17 Analog Ind 6 GND_ISO 18 Analog_In5 7 lOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 GND_ISO 20 GNDD 9 lOut5 21 Analog_In7 10 GND_ISO 22 Analog_In8 11 lOut6 23 GNDD 12 GND_ISO 24 GNDD 2 8 Mod
77. 1 16210 Send initial ratio Receive initial ratio 1 16210 sp conc high sp conc low sp conc These commands report span concentration in single range mode or the high and low span concentrations in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The following example reports the span gas concentration in single range mode Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 30 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Send sp conc Receive sp conc 1000 set sp conc value set high sp conc value set low sp conc value These commands set the span concentration to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the span concentration in the currently selected units The following example sets the span concentration to 1000 ppm in the single range mode Send set sp conc 1000 Receive set sp conc 1000 ok o2 gas This command reports the Oz span gas concentrations used to auto calibrate O2 coefficients The example below reports that the O2 span gas concentration is 20 8 Send 02 gas Receive 02 gas 20 8 set o2 gas value This command sets the O2 span gas concentration used by the auto calibration routine to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in percent The gas units are the same as those chosen by the user The example below sets the O2 span gas concentr
78. 100868 00 Measurement Interface Board 101780 00 Detector Assembly 101686 00 Heater Board Assembly 101023 00 Pressure Transducer 102055 00 Flow Transducer sample 101390 00 Solenoid Valve 101426 00 Pump 110 VAC w Plate and Fittings 108002 00 Pump Repair Kit new technology pump 8606 Pump Repair Kit 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24VDC w Base Plate and Screws 100907 00 Fan 24VDC 4510 Fuse 250VAC 3 0 Amp SlowBlow for 100VAC and 110VAC models 14007 Fuse 250VAC 1 60 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC models 7336 Capillary 0 018 inch ID 8630 Filter Guard Assembly w foam 7361 I R Source 101424 00 Optical Switch 7412 Field Mirror 7413 Entrance Mirror 7414 Exit Mirror 7358 Filter Wheel Assembly 101427 00 Chopper Motor 104678 00 02 Sensor 4119 Capillary 0 008 inch ID Oz sensor option Expendable item not covered by warranty Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Cable List Table 7 2 describes the Model 487 High Level cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 48i High Level Cables Part Number 101 036 00 Description DC Power Supply 24V Output 1037 00 115VAC Supply to Measurement Interface Board 1048 00 1038 00 1364 00 RS 485 Data Power Switch to Motherboard DC Power Supply Status Mon
79. 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Internal Temperature Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Optical Chamber Temperature 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 Alarm AGC Intensity Alarm 0 0 0 10 0 1 0 10 Bias Voltage Alarm 0 J0 0 10 1 0 0 J0 Pressure Alarm 0 0 UI 0 0 0 0 Sample Flow Alarm 0 10 1 0 0 10 0 10 Motor Speed Alarm 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not Used 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific
80. 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display void unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen int e K unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i lt 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptrt Oxff rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with Windows it needs to be saved as a 4 bit per pixel gray scale image Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data i e the top display line is the last line in the BMP menutext This command displays the text of the menu item where the cursor is currently positioned The following example shows that the cursor is positioned at the instrumen
81. 3 p a e p A Motor Motor Plate Figure 7 6 Removing the Motor 3 Remove the cross recessed screw on the bottom of the motor plate 4 Insert the 5 64 inch Allen wrench through the access hole in the bottom of the motor plate loosen the set screw holding the filter wheel to the motor shaft and carefully pry the filter wheel off the motor shaft Figure 7 5 5 Install new filter wheel by following the previous steps in reverse Make sure that the set screw seats on the flat of the motor shaft 6 After the filter wheel is installed spin the wheel and observe that it runs true on the motor shaft 7 Let the instrument sample zero air for about 90 minutes 8 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Initial S R Ratio The Initial S R Ratio screen appears Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Chopper Motor Replacement Chopper Motor Replacement A 7 14 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 9 At the Initial S R Ratio screen press to select set the initial S R ratio to the value of the current ratio and press to store the value The initial S R ratio should be between 1 14 and 1 18 10 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Use the following procedure to replace the chopper motor Figure 7 6 Equipment Requi
82. 4 Remove the two retaining screws holding the flow transducer to the floor plate and remove the flow transducer Figure 7 12 Retaining Screws 2 Figure 7 12 Replacing the Flow Transducer 5 Install the new flow transducer following the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the flow transducer Refer to the Flow Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the flow transducer Equipment Required Calibrated flow sensor WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Disconnect the pump cable from AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Capillary Cleaning or Replacement 3 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration The Flow Sensor Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 10 11 At the Flow Sensor Cal screen press to select Zero The Ca
83. 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu CO priori PLP Bench Temperature The Bench Temperature screen displays the current bench temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 40 to 59 C If the bench temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Bench Temp EY aad fat Min and Max Bench The Minimum Bench Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum bench temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum bench temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Bench Temp gt Min or Max CO priori Piet Pressure The Pressure screen displays the current reaction chamber pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 250 to 1 000 mmHg If the pressure reading goes beyond either 3 70 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Chr Ph dm TTC CO mid PPP LES iin ee Min and Max Pressure The Minimum Pres
84. 48 High Level Instruction Manual BR C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Command Description Page copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 25 pad custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration B 36 data treatment Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in Irecs B 20 Ier data treatment Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in srecs B 20 srec date Reports sets current date B 39 default params Sets parameters to default values B 40 dhcp Reports sets state of use of Dynamic Host Configuration B 43 Protocol DHCP diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage level for 1 0 expansion board B 19 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard B 18 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface B 19 board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 50 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 50 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 33 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 50 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per channel B 51 en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 33 er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions in B 21 the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B 21 meas
85. 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Calibration Calibrate Pressure Zero Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu EPR EES BLP Mi mnie PS PHP ESE ri The Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The pressure calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter The pressure sensor s zero counts and span slope are displayed on the menu Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration ERE ak try aan BEEP Eees METER Lid CH crinii DRIeIWKSIS ii The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen calibrates the pressure sensor at zero pressure Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before performing the zero calibration A Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Zero Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Service Menu Calibrate Pressure Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the pressure sensor calibration span point Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be disconnected so the sensor is reading
86. 5 pin cables continue for 37 pin cables Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Pin Color Pin Color 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PINK RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE 37 LIGHT GREEN BLACK Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 3 through Figure 9 6 Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack Mounted in an EIA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles This configuration is intended for direct replacement of a C series instrument in an existing rack The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the front mounting screw slots are in non standard EIA locations Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 9 7 Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 3 Rack Mount Option Assembly 9 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction M
87. 6 The following example sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok The erec lrec and srec layouts contain the following e A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the erec layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel display screens Values are read using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 53 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for ASCII Responses Format Specifier for Binary Responses Format Specifier for Erec Layout B 54 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual The first line of the layout response is the scanf like parameter list for parsing the fields fr
88. 6 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Alarm Message Alarm Motor Speed Possible Cause Defective measurement interface board Defective chopper motor or cable Action Replace measurement interface board Check chopper motor cable Replace chopper motor Alarm CO Conc Concentration has exceeded range limit Concentration low Check to insure range corresponds with expected value If not select proper range Check user defined low set point set to zero Alarm Zero Check Alarm Span Check Alarm Zero Autocal Alarm Span Autocal Instrument out of calibration Recalibrate instrument Check gas supply Perform manual calibration Alarm Motherboard Status Alarm Interface Status Alarm UD Exp Status Internal cables not connected properly Board is defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Recycle AC power to instrument If still alarming change board Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the Connection electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table Diagrams 6 8 to troubleshoot board level faults EXPANSION UO TOMEASURAVENT SYSTEM DIGITAL OUTPUTS 37 Pin 8 Pin RS232 RS485 LCD
89. 7 High Level subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced or is an expendable item not covered under warranty Expendable items are indicated with an asterisk in the Model 48i High Level Replacement Parts table For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode described in the Operation chapter also includes p P parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations on page 7 41 This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 5 2 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 8 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 8 e Fan Filter Replacement on page 7 10 e IR Source Replacement on page 7 11 e Filter Wheel Replacement on page 7 12 e Chopper Motor Replacement on page 7 14 e Optical Bench Replacement on page 7 15 e Optical Switch Replacement on page 7 16 Model 48 High Level Instruc
90. COR dual range only HI Sample Reference Analog Input 3 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Range Status auto range only UK Internal Temperature Bench Temperature Analog Input 4 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Analog Input 5 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Bench Pressure Analog Input 6 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Thermo Fisher Scientific Sample Flow Analog Input 7 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Intensity Analog Input 8 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Motor Speed Bias Supply Ext Alarms Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Concentrations Corrected Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs 02 Sensor Temp Analog Input The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input Configuration channels available for configuration This screen is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering the Descriptor Units Decimal Places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config IRNIeIWKSIS KAS Lu AP Pid E EEE E DH Guided Pit Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descr
91. Calibration Menu Period Hours The Zero Span Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between zero span checks Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable To turn the zero span check off set the period to 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Period Hr te ERED CH wee CO mid EN EUH Eut Beee PME OS Le Lo Af Let telen Total Duration Hour The Total Duration Hour line is the sum of the zero span and purge duration minutes and is for viewing only Zero Span Purge The Zero Duration Minutes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by Duration Minutes the instrument The Span and Purge Duration Minutes screens look and function the same way as the zero duration screen The span duration screen is used to set how long the span gas is sampled by the instrument The purge duration screen is used to set how long the purge period will be after doing a zero or span check This gives the instrument time to flush out the zero and span gas before any meaningful data is taken Logged data is flagged as taken during a purge to show that the data is suspect Durations between 0 and 99 minutes are acceptable Each time a zero span check occurs the zero check is done first followed by the span check To perform just a zero check set the span duration to 0 off The same applies to perform just a span check e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span or Purge Dur
92. D VENT EXTRA OUTLETS CAPPED WHEN NOT IN USE TO INLET OF ANALYZER UNDER CALIBRATION Figure 4 1 Calibration Flow Schematic Use the following procedure to set the CO reading to zero 1 Allow sufficient time for the Model 487 High Level to warm up and stabilize 2 Adjust the dilution system of Figure 4 1 so that zero air alone is present in the manifold Since not all flow controllers have a positive shut off it might be necessary to disconnect the CO input line and cap it 3 Allow the instrument to sample zero air until a stable reading is obtained 4 Dress and choose Calibration gt Cal Background 5 In the Calibrate Zero screen press to set the CO reading to zero If a strip chart recorder is used to obtain a record of the analog output it is recommended that the system be adjusted to obtain a zero trace at 5 of scale This is to allow observation of zero drift and or zero noise Record the stable zero air response as Z Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Span Adjust Use the following procedure to adjust the span l Adjust the zero air flow and the CO flow from the standard CO cylinder to provide a diluted CO concentration of approximately 80 of the upper range limit URL of the analyzer The total air flow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer connected to the output manifold to ensure that no ambient air is pulled into the manifold ve
93. DISPLAY RS232 RS485 10 BASE T 8 Pin EXPANSION RS485 topin SPARE DATA 8 Pin ANALOG OUTPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 37 Pin gt IPIs 3 Pin POWER_GOOD 3 Pin 3 Pin REAR PANEL AC INPUT P1 2 Pin AC FRONT PANEL S gt POWERSW EE 7 PJ6 i l TRANSFCRVER 7 3 Pin SE 4 OVACA 240VAC E I CPTICNS I Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams TO COMMON ELECTRONICS ME ASUREMENT INTERFACE BOARD 12 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 16 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin became oom 1 OU Re BOARD CIR DETECTOR ond _ CHOPPER MOTOR _ OPTICAL PICKUP CHAMBER PRESSURE SAMPLE FLOW _ PURGE FLOW SW _ AMBIENT TEMP THERM _ ZERO SPAN SOL _ SAMPLE SOL SPAN1 SOL SPAN2 SOL _ FAN FANSW1 C FAN Sw2 _ 02 SENSOR Optional CM AC 02 Not Used C AC BENCH CM ac PUMP Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Pin Descriptions Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table 6 8 can be used along with the board level connection diagra
94. High Level Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Other Measurements Analog Inputs 3 42 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Corrected Concentrations The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Other Measurements The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Analog Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu WH rid TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications
95. Manual CO pikari Ce oat de The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new record will be generated The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Interval The Add Labels screen allows the operator to toggle between YES and NO If set to YES then each data point in the streaming record will have a label attached e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Add Labels The Prepend Time Stamp screen allows the operator to toggle between YES and NO If set to YES then each streaming data record will start with a time and date stamp indicating when that record was generated e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Prepend Timestamp The Add Flags screen allows the operator to toggle between YES and NO If set to YES then each streaming data record will include a set of flags that indicate various diagnostic or alarm conditions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Add Flags Thermo Fisher Scientific Choose Stream Data Item Concentrations Corrected Concentrations Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu T
96. Manual xvii Tables xviii Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Table B 5 Record Output Fomats ccccccccccccseescsteseeteseseseeeseseseseseeseees B 23 Table B 6 Stream Time Values oc cccceccececsesseeesseseeseesecsesteseeseeseeneanesneseens B 26 Table B 7 Standard Range B 35 Table B 8 Run B 39 Table B 9 Reply Termination Format B 44 Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values c cccccccesccsteseeseeseeeeteeteseeseens B 46 Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values ccc ccecccececesesescetesesesteeseseateesees B 47 Table B 12 Set Layout Ack ValU S 0 0 c ccccccccccccccscscescsesteseseseeeseseseseseeneees B 47 Table B 13 Analog Current Output Range Values ccccccccceeeceesteeeeees B 48 Table B 14 Analog Voltage Output Range Values oo cccccceecceeeeeteeeteees B 49 Table B 15 Default Analog Output Channel Aesigonmentz B 51 Table C 1 Read Coils for 487 High Level C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for 48i High Level C 10 Table C 3 Write Coils for 48i High Level C 12 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 487 High Level D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 487 High Level D 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 487 High Level CO Analyzer measures CO concentration using Gas Filter Correlation GFC The Model 487 High Level combines proven detection technology easy to use menu driven firmware and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 487
97. Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Gas Filter Correlation CO Analyzer Part Number 102778 00 18Dec2010 Ce Thermo 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 48i High Level CO gas analyzer It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manua
98. N For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask Li COOL r Daf Or OO ite rel Phd mv ig LAR ELI iPr The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP Server address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt NTP Svr 1
99. ND 104 CAL TO LOW SPAN 105 AOUTS TO ZERO 106 AOUTS TO FS 107 CAL TO HIGH SPAN 108 NOT USED 109 NOT USED 110 NOT USED 111 ZERO PURGE CAL 112 SPAN PURGE CAL 113 ZERO SPAN PURGE 114 EXT ALARM 1 115 EXT ALARM 2 116 EXT ALARM 3 117 PURGE MODE In addition to the coils listed in the Write Coils table coils in the Read Coils table can also be read Reading a Write Coil To read a write coil issue a read coil command for that coil For example to view the state of write coil 101 issue a read coil 101 C 12 Model Ap High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Gesytec Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Gesytec commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Gesytec protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Gesytec commands listed below For details of the Model 487 High Level Gesytec Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 e Instrumen
100. O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages Mettet Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard Voltages BREED oC pogen gy mre INIeIWKSIS EY Led La de POES sed Pi EE EE Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the interface board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board Voltages 3 62 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Chi ne FJ es Pa timc pH Ott Prion mF Lii PS UO Board Voltages The I O Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board Voltages Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the current internal instrument temperature and bench temperature The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Temperatures Pressure The Pressure screen read only displ
101. Password screen is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password a Sa KS i Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e In the Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Unlock Instrument CO Cttd Piet 3 96 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Equipment Required CO Concentration Standard Zero Air Generator Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 4 Calibration This chapter describes the procedures for performing a standard zero span calibration and a multipoint calibration of the Model 487 High Level The information described here is more than adequate to perform the calibration However if greater detail is needed please refer to the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems The following sections discuss the required apparatus and procedure for calibrating the instrument The following equipment is required to calibr
102. RNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION Ifthe LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Mode
103. Relay N O Contact 22 Digital Ground 23 TTL Input 3 24 TTL Input 4 25 TTL Input 6 26 Digital Ground 27 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Digital Ground 6 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin 33 34 35 36 37 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Analog Voltage 2 Analog Voltage 4 Analog Ground Analog Voltage 6 Analog Ground VOLTAGE TEST ADM 3 3V 15V 15V SER EN J7 Serial Enable Jumper 3 3V 24V IN 24V Ground RESET PROC Reset Proc Ground DIGITAL 1 0 EXT RS485 Thermo Fisher Scientific Oo aoa N O o A W N st si O oOo N OQO o A WO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock RS485 to Rear Panel RS485 to Rear Panel 5V 5V 5V Ground Ground Ground Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin D Sec D D D D CO E w N Signal Description NC NC 24 24 24 24 24 24 MONITOR 24V Power Monitor Ground FRONT PANEL BD 6 10 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual oOo a N oon A WW N D D D D D D D D co CO N o ol Es w N N N N N N FP N Q Ground Ground LCLK LCD Sig
104. SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific Number Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 487 High Level analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 1 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 10 e Alarms on page B 14 e Diagnostics on page B 18 e Datalogging on page
105. STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Address and the command is terminated with either lt CR gt with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD02 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt address 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command Le if the received command was terminated with a lt CR gt then the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCCs then the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 02 after the MD indicates that two measurements are present in the reply string 03 for three measurements and so on This will also determine the length of the reply string
106. The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of Outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte Count 1 Byte N Output Status N Byte N N or N 1 N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 lllegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Respo
107. U Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP a MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are
108. actienieueeseteueaenens 7 26 Optional Zero Span and Sample Solenoid Valve Replacement 7 27 Analog Q tput Eege EE 7 28 Analog Output lee EE 7 30 Analog Input Calibration eege eine gees E 7 31 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volt 7 31 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale wees eeeeeeeereeees 7 32 Ambient Temperature Calibration sssssssssssssssssesesseresrrererersrsesesrsree 7 33 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement ssssseseseeeeereeeeeeeesse 7 34 Internal Oz Sensor Optional Replacement 7 36 Digital Output NEE 7 36 Motherboard Replacenren t cca nicctact secs cteseceyes teaeec dec teense decnase eden 7 37 Measurement Interface Board Replacement sssesceeseseereeseeeeneeee 7 38 Front Panel Board Replacentient eener Greet 7 39 LCD Module Replacement E 7 40 Service Locations aneha ede Aan nase ETE E 7 41 System Descripti i EE 8 1 SE 8 1 Optical Bence hss 425 ee 8 2 Band pass Pubes tia EE 8 2 Bieichh Heater Board tee eege 8 2 Chopper Motor syiscjecierlsccsineivetlicasceicriactasiaecteniacnda eve E a 8 2 Op cal TE 8 3 Gas Filter NW Ce eege Dn ae heer teh does Sacre Sands cae ata 8 3 E KEE 8 3 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual xi Contents xii Chapter 9 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Pre amplifier Assembly with IR Detector ANEN 8 3 Sample Flow S ns0 sssini i eas iE 8 3 Press re Transducer oideis oon agetratt Eiai 8 3 Capillary aisiais en a KEES KEE E EERE a 8 3
109. addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 40 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 41 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 41 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands BA Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Command Description Page addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port B 41 addr ntp Reports sets IP address for network time protocol server B 42 age int Reports current AGC intensity B 18 alarm agc intensity Reports sets AGC intensity alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm agc intensity Reports sets AGC intensity alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm bias voltage Reports sets bias voltage alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm bias voltage Reports sets bias voltage alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm chamber Reports sets bench temperature alarm maximum value B 14 temp max alarm chamber Reports sets bench temperature alarm minimum value B 14 temp min alarm conc max Reports sets current CO concentration alarm maximum value B 15 alarm conc min Reports sets current CO concentration alarm minimum value B 15 alarm conc o2 max Reports sets current oxygen concentration alarm maximum B 15 value alarm conc o2 min Reports sets current oxygen concentration alarm minimum B 15 value alarm internal Reports sets internal temperature alarm maximum value
110. al Use the following procedure to replace the detector preamplifier assembly Figure 7 9 Equipment Required detector preamplifier assembly Allen wrenches 3 32 inch and 7 64 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the cable from the PREAMP connector on the measurement interface board and disconnect the two wires from the top of the chopper motor plate Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preamp Cover gt f Detector Assy ____p Optical Bench Servicing Detector Preamplifier Assembly Replacement Access Holes To Motor Plate Preamp Board To PREAMP on Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 9 Replacing the Detector Preamplifier Assembly 3 Remove the two screws holding the preamplifier cover to the preamplifier assembly and remove the cover 4 Insert an Allen wrench through the access holes in the preamplifier printed circuit board and remove the screws holding the detector assembly to the optical bench Carefully remove the detector assembly from the optical bench 5 Install the new detector assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the preamp board and then return to Step 7 to set S R Refer to th
111. alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 20000 The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the CO concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentration Min and Max The Minimum Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the Concentration Limits minimum concentration alarm limits The minimum and maximum concentration alarm limit screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentration gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Alarms Menu Min Trigger The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the Concentration concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Select Concentration gt MinTrigger 02 Concentration The O Concentration Alarm screen displays the current oxygen concentration
112. ale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 12 The following example reports that the instrument is configured to do nothing Send layout ack Receive layout ack 0 set layout ack value This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 12 Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok Table B 12 Set Layout Ack Values Value Function 0 Do nothing default 1 Append tz This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send tz Receive tz EST 5EDT Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Configuration B 48 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual set tz string This command sets the timezone string for the instrument for use with the NTP server where string is a standard timezone string Common strings are listed in the Timezone screen description in Chapter 3 Send set tz EST 5EDT Receive set tz EST 5EDT ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channel where chan
113. all the logged data in memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the lrec srec or streaming data list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs list Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok set copy lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the lrec srec or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current lrec srec or streaming data lists The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the s
114. ambient pressure before performing the span calibration The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Span CO pieri PIL Restore Default Pressure The Restore Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the Calibration pressure calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Set Defaults 3 80 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Flow Calibration The Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the flow sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The flow calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration ERED key To Tite Bt Ebb Ees RN Lid DRIeIWKSIS Calibrate Flow Zero The Calibrate Flow Zero screen calibrates the flow sensor at zero flow Note The pump must be disconnected before performing the zero calibration A Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the readin
115. ame Reports sets host name string B 44 init ratio Reports initial sample reference ratio B 29 instr name Reports instrument name B 44 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 44 internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature B 12 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 33 layout ack Disables stale layout layout changed indicator B 47 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 33 list din Lists current selection for digital input B 52 list dout Lists current selection for digital output B 52 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 20 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 20 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 20 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 20 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 52 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 52 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 52 low avg time Reports sets low averaging time B 10 low co Reports CO concentration calculated with low range B 11 coefficients low co coef Reports sets low range CO coefficient B 27 low coef 0 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from lo multi point B 28 calibration Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Bi C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual
116. ample reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send data treatment lrec Receive data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the lrecs or srecs The following example sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok list lrec list srec list stream list sp These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data srec logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list Refer to the sp field command for information on how to edit the scratch pad The following example shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable x x time 1 10 auxt 2 13 pres 3 14 smplfl 4 15 intensity Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging erec erxy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command
117. and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 00 to 100 00 with defaults of 25 00 minimum and maximum If the O2 concentration goes above either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated This alarm is only visible if the internal O sensor option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt O2 Concentration Min and Max 0 The Minimum O Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the Concentration Limits minimum oxygen concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum O concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt O2 Concentration gt Min or Max 3 76 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Min Trigger The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the O2 concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt O2 Concentration gt Min Trigger CO mid External Alarms The External Alarms menu is used to display the external alarm status for alarm 1 2 and 3 only if the external alarm is assigne as a digital input External alarms can be assigned to digital inputs using the Instruments Controls
118. ange is set to 100 ppm Figure 3 6 Sample concentrations below 50 ppm are output based on low range selection and sample concentrations above 50 ppm are output based on high range selection When the low range is active the status output is at 0 volts When the high range is active the status output is at half of full scale When the high range is active the concentration must drop to 95 of the low CO range for the low range to become active In addition each CO analog output has a span coefficient There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another For example the low CO range is set to 0 50 ppm and the high CO range is set to 0 20000 Note When using auto range mode the high and low ranges should not vary by more than 1 order of magnitude For instance if the low range is set to 20 ppm then the high range should be set to no more than 200 ppm This is because the concentration response is non linear and it is possible that the low range readings could become unpredictable above the top of the low range resulting in a substantial jump in concentration readings when switching between ranges One possible fix for this would be to perform the 3 point calibration via the Service menu on both ranges and make sure that the low range high point matches or is greater than the Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Range Men
119. anual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 4 Bench Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 9 9 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 5 EIA Rack Mounting 9 10 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 6 Retrofit Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 9 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon
120. at least 2 The meter and controller can be two separate devices or combined in one device The user s manual for the meter should be consulted for calibration information Additional information on the calibration of flow devices can be found in the Quality Assurance Handbook It should be noted that all flows should be corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg and that care should be exercised in correcting for water vapor content The regulator used must have a nonreactive diaphragm and internal parts as well as a suitable delivery pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Mixing Chamber Output Manifold Pre Calibration Calibration Connect the Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Pre Calibration A chamber constructed of glass Teflon or other nonreactive material and designed to provide thorough mixing of CO and diluent air for the dilution method is required The output manifold should be constructed of glass Teflon or other nonreactive material and should be of sufficient diameter to ensure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection The system must have a vent designed to ensure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold Prior to calibration be sure the instrument is operating properly Turn on the instrument and allow it to stabilize for one hour Perform the service checks of the Preventive Maintenance chapter Select the operating range an
121. ate the instrument A cylinder of CO in air containing an appropriate concentration of CO suitable for the selected operating range of the analyzer under calibration is necessary The assay of the cylinder must be traceable either to a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST CO in Air Standard Reference Material SRM or an NIST EPA approved gas manufacturer s Certified Reference Material CRM A recommended protocol for certifying CO gas cylinders against a CO SRM or CRM is given in the Quality Assurance Handbook The CO gas cylinder should be recertified on a regular basis determined by the local quality control program Calibration requires zero air that is free of contaminants which will cause a detectable response on the CO analyzer The zero air should contain lt 0 01 ppm CO Since the Model 487 High Level is virtually interference free it is only necessary to ensure that CO has been removed It should be noted that zero air as supplied in cylinders from commercial suppliers typically contains CO concentrations in the 0 1 0 3 ppm range So cylinder zero air should be scrubbed of the residual CO prior to its use in the Model 487 High Level as a dilution gas or a zero standard Room air which has been scrubbed of CO can also be used as the zero air source It is not necessary to remove SO2 NO NO2 COs water vapor or hydrocarbons since the Model 487 High Level does not respond to these Model 48 High Level Instructi
122. ation to 20 8 Send set 02 gas 20 8 Receive set 02 gas 20 8 ok span cal reset This command reports that the span cal reset is on or off The following example reports that the span cal reset is on Send span cal reset Receive span cal reset on set span cal reset onoff onoff on off This command sets the span cal reset to on or off The following example sets the span cal reset to off Send set span cal reset off Receive set span cal reset off ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration span dev This command reports the span deviation span check offset The following example reports that the span deviation is 1 ppb Send Span dev Receive span dev 1 000 E 00 set span dev value This command sets the span deviation span check offset to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in current selected units The following example sets the span deviation to 345 ppb Send set span dev 345 Receive set span dev 345 ok span dur This command reports the span duration The following example reports that the span duration min is 10 minutes Send span dur Receive span dur 10 min set span dur value This command sets span duration to value where value represents the span duration in minutes The following example sets the span duration to 15 minutes Send set span dur 15 Receive set span dur 15 ok zero cal rese
123. ation Min Cu Dt Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Calibration Menu Zero Span Averaging The Zero Span Averaging Time screen allows the user to adjust the Time zero span averaging time The zero span averaging time is used by the analyzer only when performing an automatic zero or span check The analyzer s averaging time is used for all other functions The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Avg Sec Zero Span Calibration Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes Reset or no when selected and are displayed only if Auto Calibration is set to YES in the Instrument Configuration screen in the Diagnostics menu If the zero calibration reset line is set to yes then not only is a zero check done but a zero adjustment is made If the span calibration reset line is set to yes then not only is a span check done but a span adjustment is made This is how to set up a scheduled recurring auto calibration Zero Span Ratio The Zero Span Ratio screen is used to set the ratio of zero checks to span checks For example if this value is set to 1 a span check will follow every zero check If this value is set to 3 there will be three zero checks between each span check This value may be set from 1 to 10 with 1 as default
124. atment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at the end of the interval Note If Data Treatment is set to AVG Datalogging averaging is done in addition to the normal concentration averaging A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment EH pikari E E r EA Ph my Py Piya Lf Flag Status Data The Flag Status Data is used to set flag status data On Off Refer to Flags Status in Appendix B e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Flag Status Data DH pikor Piet 3 34 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control Settings and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings ERE CH Pi Tite oi Ota DRIeIWKSIS PME hae TEEN EE Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings ERE CH Pm Tit Bet Ebb Eest Rly DRIeIWKSIS TV Lal La Af CG Oo Ota Pir i Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 12
125. ays the current optical bench pressure The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Diagnostics Menu Flow The Flow screen read only displays the flow rate The flow is measured by an internal flow sensor For more information see Chapter 1 Introduction e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flow Sample Reference The Sample Reference Ratio screen read only displays the ratio of the Ratio intensities of the light source through the sample wavelength and reference wavelength of the bandpass filter wheel Normally when zero air is being sampled the sample reference ratio is between 1 14 and 1 18 A ratio outside may indicate that the filter wheel is dirty or the infrared source is degraded e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Sample Ref Ratio AGC Intensity The AGC Intensity screen read only displays the intensity in Hertz of the reference channel Automatic Gain Control AGC circuit The AGC circuit optimizes the noise and resolution levels of the Model 487 High Level The AGC intensity reading should be about 200 000 Hertz e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt AGC Intensity 3 64 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu CRETE RE Pro CO mid ribet 1 DRIeIWKSIS DZ Le Lo ade EES
126. bers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr ip 192 168 1 200 Receive set addr ip 192 168 1 200 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 255 0 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 42 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual set addr nm address This command sets the netmask address where address consists of four GR numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr nm 255 255 255 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 255 0 ok addr ntp This command reports the IP address for the network time protocol server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send addr ntp Receive addr ntp 10 209 43 237 set addr ntp address This command sets the network time protocol server address where address GR consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 Receive set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 ok baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The follo
127. c Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Analog Output Calibration Analog Output Calibration 7 30 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Note The pin numbers on the connector do not match the pin numbers on the terminal boards Refer to Table 2 1 through Table 2 3 for information on the pin to terminal board relationship A Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Channel Pin Current Channel Pin 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output 16 18 20 22 24 Return Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 e el fl H omy oy AJIJ nr oI NIDJI oo Ww Ph Ground 4 8 11 Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 14 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog
128. can be stored in memory is 241979 Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 241979 recs 1075 blocks lrec per srec per These commands report the lrecs and srecs logging period The following example shows that the srec logging period is 5 minutes Send srec per Receive srec per 5 min set srec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the lrecs and srecs logging period to value in minutes The following example sets the lrec logging period to 15 minutes Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 24 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs stored memory The following example shows that 50 Irecs have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for lrecs and srecs in percent of total memory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for lrecs and srecs to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The following example sets the memory allocation for lrecs to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear
129. ce in Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual iii About This Manual WEEE Symbol which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense A WEEE Symbol The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC Il WEEE and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 amp Where to Get Help Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International iv Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Contents Contents Introduction sont ccstend nani nuancusnatbuatsnbctancucndsasnsetunandadubvantantctincasntaantannets 1 1 Pring ple EE edel 1 2 Specifications eege eet dee te tegen 1 3 dE 2 1 EE 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection 2 2uuseegreeeageteEoeeu geg 2 1 BU See EE 2 3 Connecting External Devices spac cesiceacecunivelaaceianetnen dts 2 5 Terminal Board PCB IiSce mi blestsaccdtats erate aluacaomuteed ete waenale 2 5 Bereet Eege 2 5 D O Terminal Board xt cec ear sse atts ha
130. cer Replacement Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 5 Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize and then press to save the zero pressure value 6 Disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer 7 Dress to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal screen 8 At the Pressure Sensor Cal screen press to select Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears 9 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e Jand f J to enter the known barometric pressure and press _ to save the pressure value 10 Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer 11 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the flow transducer Figure 7 12 Equipment Required Flow transducer Philips screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect flow transducer cable from the FLOW connector on the measurement interface board Figure 7 2 3 Disconnect the plumbing connections from the flow transducer Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection Thermo Fisher Scientific Flow Transducer Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration A A Servicing Flow Transducer Calibration
131. cratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list of lrecs into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok sp field number This command reports the variable number and name stored at the index in the scratch pad list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list The following example shows that field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 8 which is for internal temperature Send sp field 5 Receive sp field 5 8 int temp set sp field number value number 1 32 for lrec and srec lists 1 8 for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the analog output variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the Irec srec or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set s
132. d Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Password Lock Instrument Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password Hp Ota i The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrument BEREH MPLP G If the instrument keyboard is locked via the front panel using Password gt Lock Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the keypad is locked data can be viewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password gt Unlock Instrument the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and data can be changed from the front panel Refer to C Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information about mode allow mode and power up mode commands Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 95 Operation Password Change Password The Change
133. d Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V LCD DATA J2 1 LDO_5V LCD Signal 2 LD1_5V LCD Signal 3 LD2_5V LCD Signal 4 LD3_5V LCD Signal 5 LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal 6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal 7 NC 8 LP DV LCD Signal Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Reference Designator Pin D D D D e w N Signal Description LCLK_5V LCD Signal ADM Ground 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground J3 mo N oOo wo A WO N Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Keypad Col 4 Select J4 Reference Designator J1 EN Pin oOo aoa NH wD oO FP WH FA 5V Supply NC Ground Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Analog Voltage Input 7 Analog Voltage Input 8 Ground NC Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator Current Output Return Grou
134. d record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Analog Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to any of the record fields for the selected record type Saving changes will erase record log file data for that record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Commit Content CO i PL E Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content 3 32 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type e
135. d the averaging time of the Model 487 High Level Note The averaging time should be less than the zero duration and less than the span duration A Note The calibration and calibration check duration times should be long enough to account for the transition purge process when switching from sample to zero and from zero to span This transition time is the time required to purge the existing air A Note Depending on the plumbing configuration and the instrument data from approximately the first minute of a zero calibration or check should be disregarded because of residual sample air Also data from approximately the first minute of a span calibration or check should be disregarded because the span is mixing with the residual zero air A Use the following procedure to calibrate the instrument Connect the instrument and the calibration equipment as shown in Figure 4 1 If an optional sample line filter is used the calibration must be performed through this filter Ensure that the flow rate into the output manifold is greater than the total flow required by the analyzer and any other flow demand connected to the manifold Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Calibration Zero Adjust 4 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual F OFFI cogftom CONTROLLER FLOWMETER ZERO MIXING AIR CHAMBER PRESSURE Feco REGULATOR ETS Q FLOW DK CONTROLLER SCHEIER OUTPUT Si MANIFOLD ST
136. damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component amp 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 16 4 Pop off the board from the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the previous steps in reverse Motherboard Support Bracket Mounting Studs Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Standoffs 2 1 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 16 Rear Panel Board Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Internal 02 Sensor Optional Replacement Internal 02 Sensor Optional Replacement A Digital Output Board Replacement A 7 36 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the optional internal O sensor see Figure 7 2 Equipment Required Oz sensor Philips screwdriver Wrench 7 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist stra
137. dentifies the connector pins and associated signals Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B Assembled Connector 2 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Figure 2 5 UU Terminal Board Views Table 2 1 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Analog 13 Power_Fail_NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power_Fail_COM 3 Analog2 15 Power_Fail_NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL_Input1 5 Analog3 17 TTL_Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL_Input3 7 Analog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TI Input 10 Analog ground 22 TTL_Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL_Input7 Digital ground Analog ground Thermo Fisher Scientific D O Terminal Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices identifies the connector pins and associated signals See Detail A E See Detail B y d Assembled Connector Detail A Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views Table 2 2 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw
138. diaphragm is in good condition and the capillary not blocked it should take less than one minute from the time the inlet is plugged to the time the reading below 250 mmHg is obtained Thermo Fisher Scientific Leaks Across the Optional Zero Span and Sample Solenoid Valves Pump Rebuilding Thermo Fisher Scientific A Disassembly Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding In order to check for leaks across the optional valves plug the SPAN inlet line press gt until span appears in the status line and follow the External Leaks procedure If the pressure drops below 250 mmHg the valve associated with the span line is functioning normally Repeat for the valve associated with the zero line by plugging the zero inlet press gt until zero appears in the status line and follow the External Leaks procedure If the pressure drops below 250 mmHg the valve associated with the zero line is functioning normally For new technology pump use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5 2 The new technology pump will have the repair kit part number on its label If no repair kit part number is listed refer to the procedure for the older model pump following this procedure To replace the pump see Pump Replacement on page 7 20 Equipment Required Flatblade screwdriver Pump rebuild kit flapper valve and diaphragm Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static el
139. e Preamp Board Calibration procedure that follows 7 Set S R as follows a From the Main Menu choose Service gt Initial S R Ratio The Initial S R Ratio screen appears b At the Initial S R Ratio screen press to select set the initial S R ratio to the value of the current ratio and press to store the value The initial S R ratio should be between 1 14 and 1 18 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Preamp Board Calibration Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 8 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Preamp Board Use the following procedure to calibrate the preamp board Calibration f Equipment Damage This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A 1 Let the instrument sample zero air for about 90 minutes 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Preamp Board Calibration The Preamp Board Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Preamp Board Cal screen use II E until either the Sample or Reference value reads more than 150 000 then press to save the value Pump Replaceme Nt Use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 7 10 Equipment Required Pump Nut driver Philips sc
140. e set Irec format and set srec format commands The Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 22 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual logging time is determined by the set Irec per and set srec per commands In the following example assume there are 740 lrecs currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see Figure B 1 Send lrec 5 Receive lrec 100 5 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 CO 7349E 0 loCO 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 CO 7349E 0 loCO 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 CO 7349E 0 loCO 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9cO040000 CO 7349E 0 loCO 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 CO 7349E 0 loCO 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 lrec format srec format erec format These commands report
141. e which is the item or word number in the DATA EREC response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d floating point f or binary b number Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format for example a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character can precede the precision specifier this causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an el field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be Tel The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 55 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Translation Table S
142. e CO concentration to the front panel display the analog outputs and also makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection 1 2 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Figure 1 1 Model 487 High Level Flow Schematic Specifications Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the Model 487 High Level Table 1 1 Model 48 High Level Specifications Thermo Fisher Scientific Preset ranges 0 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 ppm or mg m Custom ranges 0 50 to 20000 ppm or mg m Zero noise 2 ppm RMS 10 second averaging time Lower detectable limit 4 ppm Zero drift 24 hour lt 4 ppm Span drift 2 full scale Response time 60 seconds 30 second averaging time Linearity 2 full scale Sample flow rate 0 5 2 LPM Operating temperature 0 45 C Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Specifications Power requirements 100 VAC 50 60 Hz 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 275 watts Physical dimensions 16 75 W X 8 62 H X 23 D Weight Approximately 49 Ibs Analog outputs 6 voltage outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V user selectable 5 of full scale over under range user selectable 12 bit resolution measurement output user selec
143. e Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Bias Voltage CO guide Piet The Minimum Bias Voltage alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum bias voltage alarm limit The minimum and maximum bias voltage screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Bias Voltage gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu AGC Intensity The AGC Intensity screen displays the current AGC Intensity reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 150 000 to 300 000 Hz If the AGC intensity reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt AGC Intensity CRE RE pT CH eo bet EI Tel kees Di kal L An Ea E a H i Min and Max AGC The Minimum AGC Intensity alarm limit screen is used to change the Intensity Limits minimum AGC intensity alarm limit The minimum and maximum AGC Intensity screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt AGC Intensity gt Min or Max re PPP LES Ea E Pad Motor Speed The Motor Speed screen read only displays the current motor speed A reading other than 100 0 indicates a problem with either the motor or the power supply e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Motor Speed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 Hi
144. e concentrations simultaneously The display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time The analog output ranges are user selectable via the firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range The defaults are calculated by dividing the data values by the full scale range for each of the three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user selected output range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Electronics Motherboard System Description Electronics All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over all specified operating ranges Internal pumps and heaters all operate on 110VAC An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210 250VAC or 90 110VAC ranges An on off switch controls all power to the instrument and is accessible on the front panel The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies and a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel function keys and or over I O connections on the rear panel The motherboard sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measureme
145. e front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processors The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement values The one second accumulated counts are accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds the measurement is still reported every 10 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents th
146. e of the display shows the CO background correction that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the CO reading That is the CO background correction is subtracted from the CO reading In the following example the analyzer is reading 1 4 ppm of CO while sampling zero air The CO background correction is 0 0 ppm That is the analyzer is not applying a zero background correction The question mark is used as a prompt to change the background correction In this case the background correction must be increased to 1 4 ppm in order for the CO reading to be at 0 ppm To set the CO reading in the following example to zero use to increment the CO background correction to 1 4 ppm As the CO background correction is increased the CO concentration is decreased At this point however no real changes have been made To escape this screen without making any changes press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or gt to return to the Run screen Press to actually set the CO reading to 0 ppm and store the background correction of 1 4 ppm e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Bkg Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Calibration Factors Menu CO Coefficient 02 Background 3 18 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual The CO span coefficient is usually calculated by the instrument processor during calibration The span coefficients are used to correct the CO readi
147. e old diaphragm by turning it counterclockwise using both hands DO NOT use tools Note Take care not to lose the shim rings positioned between the diaphragm support cup and connecting rod as the same shim rings must be used during re assembly A While unscrewing the diaphragm with one hand use your other hand to secure the support cup and shim ring s onto the diaphragm stud Lift the diaphragm support cup and shim ring s from the pump The compressor housing cover must be removed to gain access to and secure the support cup and shim ring s onto the stud Note that the quantity and thickness of the shim ring s will vary from pump to pump Parts removed must be replaced exactly as found If repairing multiple pumps take care not to mix the parts Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding ci Plate Screws 4x O Top Plate lapper Valve Bottom Plate over Screws 4x ompressor Housing Cover Figure 5 2 Rebuilding the Pump New Technology Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding Assembly with New 1 Place the parts removed in the previous step onto the threaded stud of Diaphragm and Valve the new diaphragm Carefully screw the new diaphragm into the connecting rod Secure the support cup and small parts onto the diaphragm stud using a technique similar to that used during removal It is helpful to ho
148. e value is a floating point number representing bench temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the bench temperature alarm maximum value to 55 0 C Send set alarm chamber temp max 55 0 Receive set alarm chamber temp max 55 0 ok alarm conc min alarm conc max These commands report the CO concentration alarm minimum and maximum values current setting The following example reports that the CO concentration minimum is 5 2 ppm Send alarm conc min Receive alarm conc min 5 2 ppm set alarm conc min value set alarm conc max value These commands set the CO concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the CO concentration alarm maximum value to 215 Send set alarm conc max 215 Receive set alarm conc max 215 ok alarm conc o2 min alarm conc 02 max These commands report the current oxygen concentration alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the O2 concentration alarm minimum value is 10 Send alarm conc o2 min Receive alarm conc 02 min 10 00 set alarm conc 02 min value set alarm conc o2 max value These commands set the oxygen concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the oxygen concentration alarm limits in percent
149. ecesesesceteseseseetesesesteeseseetenenees 9 9 Figure 9 5 EIA Rack MOUNTING c c ccc cccecesescecesesesesteseseseeteseseseateneseseees 9 10 Figure 9 6 Retrofit Rack Mountmg 0c cece cecesesestetesesceteeseseeteeseseees 9 11 Figure B 1 Flags Fields nines ate hea aes B 13 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 487 High Level Specifications 0 cc ccccccceecseeseeteesteeeeees 1 3 Table 1 2 Model 487 High Level Optional Internal Oxygen Sensor HEEN 1 4 Table 2 1 1 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions 0 0 ccccccccccccccsteesteseeteseeeees 2 6 Table 2 2 D O Terminal Board Pin Descrgptons 2 7 Table 3 3 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descrptons 2 8 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons 00 0 eee cece eeteseeseseeseseeseseeseeneseeeeneees 3 3 Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode 3 9 Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode 3 11 Table 3 4 Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode 3 13 Table 3 5 Available Operating Hanges 3 14 Table 3 6 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table 3 52 Table 3 7 Signal Type Group Uhoces 3 53 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide oo ceeeteseeteseeteseeeees 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages 6 3 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions 0 c ccccceceseeseeeeeeeeees 6 7 Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 12 Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram
150. ectricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Make a sketch of the position of any tubes and fittings for ease of re assembly later 2 Mark the position of the pump top plate bottom plate and compressor housing relative to each other by drawing a line on the edges with a pencil or marker to ensure proper re assembly 3 The aluminum compressor housing cover must be removed to gain access to the inside compressor housing Remove the four screws and then remove the cover Re use any gasketing Remove any debris that may have accumulated in the bottom of the compressor housing Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 5 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 4 Remove the four top plate screws and remove the top plate Note the positioning of the flapper valve relative to the valve ports on the top plate and bottom plate Lift off the flapper valve 5 Remove the bottom plate 6 Check that all parts are clean from dirt and clean as necessary DO NOT scratch the parts 7 Removal of the old diaphragm Rotate the fan so that the diaphragm is positioned at the top dead center This will help unseat the edge of the diaphragm If required push up from underneath the diaphragm or use a non metallic tool to pry up the diaphragm from the housing groove Unscrew th
151. ed La de POE bd veel Pi EE EE The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records 3 28 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Erase Log Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type only not both srecs and lrecs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Erase Log KH eth dE CHa PTT pmp ithe Select Content Choose Field Data Thermo Fisher Scientific Le EPOE Emek Boone EEO hei La A POE ak e PEE EEE F The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to configure the data to be logged When a field is selected a submenu list appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields Item types are Concentrations Corrected Concentrations if the O2 compensation option is enabled Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed These record fields comprise a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the selected record type only as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content RCRUSE CaS mito CO mnie E PORE TE Peak feoeo ZY Bel LA a Zoe
152. eesesceteesesteteseseees 2 2 Figure 2 2 Removing the Shipping Screws ss ssessiseeiisesiiiseiireseiresrrrennrreenn 2 2 Figure 2 3 Model 487 High Level Rear Hang 2 4 Figure 2 4 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing ccccccceceececetesesteteeseeee 2 4 Figure 2 5 UU Terminal Board Views 2 6 Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views 2 7 Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board Views 2 8 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display cccccecccescsceecesescseecesesesesceseseseereeseseees 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel PUSNDUttONS 0 ccc cececeseseetetesesesteseseseeteeseseees 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware cccccccccecesescetesesesceteeseees 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode 3 9 Figure 3 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode 3 10 Figure 3 6 Analog Output in Auto Range Mode 3 12 Figure 3 7 Pin Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode 3 12 Figure 4 1 Calibration Flow Schematic ooo cece ccsesessesceesteesteeeeeeneees 4 4 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan 5 4 Figure 5 2 Rebuilding the Pump New Technolond 5 7 Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the Humpe 5 9 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 5 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 6 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap 7 4 Figure 7 2 Component Layout ccs scence woes neta ea nea 7 7
153. eing introduced to the instrument Press The instrument will perform a series of calculations and save the new parameters Dress BW to back up a step in the Service Mode menu 10 Repeat Step 1 for a 20 concentration of the upper range 11 Select Cal Point 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific References 12 13 14 15 1 Calibration References Use to move the cursor and TI E to increment or decrement the digit values until they match the concentration being introduced to the instrument Press The instrument will perform a series of calculations and save the new parameters Press BW J to back up a step in the Service Mode menu Select Coefficients and press The instrument will automatically calculate the new coefficients and save the new parameters Repeat Steps 1 through 12 for Hi Multi Point Cal Section 12 of EPA 454 R 98 004 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II Part 1 August 1998 available at www epa gov ttn amtic qabook html and 40 CFR 50 Appendix C Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Carbon Monoxide in the Atmosphere Non Dispersive Infrared Photometry Section 12 also provides information on Calibration of Primary and Secondary Standards for Flow Measurements Specific information on certification of concentration standards is given in EPA 600 R93 224
154. el 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Startup Sta HD Use the following procedure when starting the instrument l Turn the power ON Allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times to appropriate settings For more information about instrument parameters see the Operation chapter Before beginning the actual monitoring perform a multipoint calibration as described in the Calibration chapter Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 2 9 Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 8 e Averaging Time on page 3 15 e Calibration Factors Menu on page 3 16 e Calibration Menu on page 3 20 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 25 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 61 e Alarms Menu on page 3 68 e Service Menu on page 3 78 e Password on page 3 94 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus u
155. election Table Button Designator B 56 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B T HS TT or INT B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output va
156. entration of approximately 80 of the upper range limit URL of the instrument The total air flow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer connected to the output manifold to ensure that no ambient air is pulled into the manifold vent The exact CO concentration is calculated from Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration HI and LO Multi Point Calibration 4 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual CO sm X Foo CO our S CO Jour Fp Foo VE LC 7 Where CO our diluted CO concentration at the output manifold ppm CO srp concentration of the undiluted CO standard ppm Fco flow rate of CO standard corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg L min Fp flow rate of dilution air corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg L min Allow the Model 487 High Level to sample this CO concentration standard until a stable response is obtained From the Main Menu select Service Mode gt Lo Multi Point Cal gt Cal Point 1 Use elo to move the cursor and t to increment or decrement the digit values until they match the concentration being introduced to the instrument Press The instrument will perform a series of calculations and save the new parameters Dress to back up a step in the Service Mode menu Repeat Step 1 for a 50 concentration of the upper range Select Cal Point 2 Use elo to move the cursor and to increment or decrement the digit values until they match the concentration b
157. eports the zero span zs period The following example reports that the zero span period is 24 hours Send zs period Receive zs period 24 hr set zs period value This command sets zero span zs period to value where value represents the zero span period in hours The following example sets the zero span period to 24 hours Send set zs period 24 Receive set zs period 24 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Keys Display Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display zs avg time This command reports the zero span zs averaging time in seconds The following example reports that the zero span averaging time is 30 seconds according to Table B 3 Send zs avg time Receive zs avg time 5 30 sec set avg time value This command sets the zero span averaging time according to Table B 3 The following example sets the zero span averaging time to 120 seconds Send set zs avg time 8 Receive set zs avg time 8 ok push button do ri down right en ru enter run he up help 1 le 2 left 3 me 4 menu button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen These commands retrieve the framebuffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size
158. epresenting sample flow alarm limits in liters per minute The following example sets the sample flow alarm maximum value to 1 L min Send set alarm sample flow max 1 000 Receive set alarm sample flow max 1 000 ok alarm trig conc This command reports the CO concentration alarm trigger action for minimum alarm current setting to either floor or ceiling The following example shows the CO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling according to Table B 4 Send alarm trig conc Receive alarm trig conc 1 set alarm trig conc value This command sets the CO concentration alarm minimum value where value is set to either floor or ceiling according to Table B 4 The following example sets the CO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling Send set alarm trig conc 1 Receive set alarm trig conc 1 ok Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Diagnostics B 18 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Table B 4 Alarm Trigger Values Value Alarm Trigger 00 Floor 01 Ceiling alarm trig conc 02 This command reports the Oz concentration alarm trigger action for minimum alarm current setting to either floor or ceiling The following example shows the O concentration minimum alarm trigger set to ceiling according to Table B 4 Send alarm trig conc 02 Receive alarm trig conc oi 1 set alarm trig conc 02 value This command sets the O2 concentration alarm minimum
159. ermines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with lt CR gt no checksum is attached The block checksum is represented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte OxAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp DI The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Gesytec protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There are three control commands supported by the Gesytec protocol This lt control commands is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode Command K switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode Command M switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt Model 48 High Level Instructio
160. ers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The Force Write Single Coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of 0xFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function Code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 lllegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Here is an example
161. essure variations The effects of bench pressure changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output D 8 y y p Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 02 Compensation 3 58 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any change in bench pressure When pressure compensation is on the first line of the display represents the current pressure in the fluorescence chamber When pressure compensation is off the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 750 mmHg e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pressure Compensation The O Compensation screen is used to turn oxygen compensation on or off When O2 compensation is enabled the following equation is applied to the concentration value to generate a corrected value CO COR The corrected value may be output on the analog outputs stored in logging memory or output as streaming data The corrected values are not displayed on the Run screen on the front panel only the non corrected values 20 9 7 O Zerr 20 9 02 nis Abbreviations C is the measured concentration O2 is the oxygen concentration that C is corrected to this value is set by the user in the SERVICE gt O2 CORRECTION CONC menu and defaults to 15 O2 meas is the measured O2 concentration which is clamped at 20 8 to prevent divide by zero e
162. expressed in that is subtracted from the Oz reading to produce the O reading that is displayed In the example below the analyzer displays 0 12 of O2 while sampling nitrogen A background correction of 0 00 means that 0 is being subtracted from the O concentration being displayed Therefore the background correction must be increased to 0 12 in order for the O2 reading to be at 0 i e an O2 reading of 0 12 minus an O2 background reading of 0 12 gives the corrected Oz reading of 0 To set the O reading in the example below to zero use af increment the O2 background correction to 0 12 As the O2 background correction is increased the O2 concentration is decreased Note that at this point pressing and however has no affect on the analog outputs or the stored O2 background correction of 0 00 A question mark following both the O reading and the O2 background correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To escape this screen without saving any changes press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or to return to the Run screen Press to actually set the O reading to 0 00 and store the new background correction of 0 12 Then the question mark prompt beside the Oz reading disappears e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt O2 Background The O2 Coefficient screen allows the O2 span coefficients to be changed manually while sampling span gas of known co
163. f the curve developed from the Hi Multi Point Calibration in dual or auto range mode The low coef 0 low coef 1 and low coef 2 commands report the coefficients of the curve developed from the Lo Multi Point Calibration in dual and auto range mode The following example reports the coefficient 0 having a value of 1 005 Send coef 0 Receive coef 0 1 005 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration co bkg This command reports the current CO backgrounds The following example reports that the CO background is 1 4 ppm Send co bkg Receive co bkg 1 4 ppm set co bkg value This command is used to set the CO background to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the background in the currently selected units The following example sets the CO background to 1 4 ppm Send set co bkg 1 400 Receive set co bkg 1 400 ok bkg 02 This command reports the oxygen background concentration in percent The following example reports that the current O2 background concentration is 1 5 Send bkg oi Receive bkg 02 1 50 set bkg 02 This command is used to set the oxygen background concentration in percent The example below sets the O2 background concentration to 1 5 Send set bkg 02 1 5 Receive set bkg 02 1 5 ok init ratio This command reports the initial sample reference ratio The following example reports that the initial ratio was
164. f the inputs so if nothing is connected they will read 1 ifan input is brought to ground it will read 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs Paus iia Labi ib i Relay States The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States e Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the selected digital output 3 66 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu a pri p HELE E perm WH nyirni E a E L Pi AG Lf bi Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs CH med Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the
165. face board Philips screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the measurement bench and lower the partition panel to gain access to the measurement interface board connectors and standoffs Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 8 2 Unplug all connectors from the measurement interface board Figure 7 17 Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate reconnection 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop the measurement interface board off of the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board 4 To install the measurement interface board follow the previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement case assembly Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 8 in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Mounting Studs 2 Mounting Screws 2 Figure 7 17 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Front panel board amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal
166. fic Calibration Servicing Ambient Temperature Calibration 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press E Io scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press A Press to scroll to Calibrate Full scale and press e The screen displays the current input voltage for the selected channel 5 Usel J and toenter the source voltage and press 4 Jto calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage 6 Dress gt Jto return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature for the instrument Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10K ohm 1 resistor WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermometer to the thermistor which is plugged into the measurement interface board Figure 7 3 Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a va
167. g to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Zero Ai aa pe mh drs Poren pH Drini Rri Tic a LA ii Calibrate Flow Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow sensor calibration span point Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Service Menu Note An independent flow sensor is required to read the flow then the operator enters the flow value on this screen to perform the calibration A Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Span OPER EEE i Restore Default Flow The Restore Default Flow Calibration screen allows the user to reset the Calibration flow calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Set Defaults ERED CH perm Pp E L Ea bii i Wi mid CO Ota Pin Paid EAE Lied a Ph my PP PP AMES Pil bi Pree Initial The Initial Sample Reference S R Ratio screen displays both the initial Sample Reference S R ratio and the current S R ratio The initial S R ratio is determined at Rati the factory and is used to correct for the slight variations found from one HD correlation wheel to another The only time the initial S R ratio should be changed is when the correlation wheel is replaced or
168. ge 1 Voltage Output CO Low CO CO 2 Voltage Output CO High CO Range Status 3 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 5 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 6 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 7 Current Output CO Low CO CO 8 Current Output CO High CO Range Status 9 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 10 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 11 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 12 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 52 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital inputs or the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Channels that have not been assigned a variable index are not displayed Send Receive list dout list dout output index variable state 1 22 I O BD COMM closed 2 2 LOCAL REMOTE open 3 4 UNITS open 4 19 BIAS VOLTAGE closed 7 7 SAMPLE MODE open 8 8 GEN MODE open list var aout list var dout list var din These commands report the list of index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode for analog outputs digital outputs and digital inputs The
169. gh Level Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Alarms Menu Zero and Span Check Max Zero and Span Offset Zero and Span Auto Calibration 3 74 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Mettet The Zero and Span Check screens allow the user to view the status of the most recent zero span checks and set the maximum check offsets An alarm will be triggered if a zero or span check indicates drift that exceeds the offset value The zero and span check screens are visible only if the zero span check option is enabled Their functions are similar e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check Mettet The Max Zero Check Offset screen is used to change the maximum zero check offset The maximum zero and span offset screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check gt Max Offset The Zero and Span Auto Calibration screens read only allow the user to view the status of the most recent auto background calibration or span calibrations The zero and span auto calibration screens are visible only if the zero span check option is enabled and the zero or span cal reset function is enabled and the zero and span cal reset function is enabled Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Autocal Concentration The Concentration screen displays the current CO concentration and sets the minimum and maximum
170. gned soft keys A Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Firmware Overview Alphanumeric Entry The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters Screen Entry Line gt Keyboard Firmware Overview 3 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Jand sg keys Ifa character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the and keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyboard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter Wi hoi Bab L it CH Gabo bt EME
171. gth of 4 6 microns Because Operation Ser Su infrared absorption is a non linear measurement technique it is necessary to transform the basic analyzer signal into a linear output The Model 487 High Level uses an internally stored calibration curve to accurately linearize the instrument output over any range up to a concentration of 20 000 The sample is drawn into the Model 487 High Level through the sample bulkhead as shown in Figure 1 1 The sample flows through the optical bench Radiation from an infrared source is chopped and then passed through a gas filter alternating between CO and N2 The radiation then passes through a narrow bandpass interference filter and enters the optical bench where absorption by the sample gas occurs The infrared radiation then exits the optical bench and falls on an infrared detector The CO gas filter acts to produce a reference beam which cannot be further attenuated by CO in the sample cell The N side of the filter wheel is transparent to the infrared radiation and therefore produces a measurement beam which can be absorbed by CO in the cell The chopped detector signal is modulated by the alternation between the two gas filters with an amplitude related to the concentration of CO in the sample cell Other gases do not cause modulation of the detector signal since they absorb the reference and measure beams equally Thus the GFC system responds specifically to CO The Model 487 High Level outputs th
172. haia ld a Ta PER 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Front Panel Front Panel Board Power Supply Measurement Interface Board Motherboard Figure 7 2 Component Layout Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Removing the The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partition panel y P P Measurement Case on be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Assembly and Lowering see Figure 7 3 the Partition Panel SLIDE CASE ASSEMBLY OUT Connectors i REMOVE SCREWS Pass Through 7 Loosen Partition Panel Captive t Remove Hidden Screw Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 7 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Fuse Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific 10 Servicing Fuse Replace
173. hannel gt select Point gt Volts PME Eee EE EE Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu User Value The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt User Value Temperature Temperature compensation provides compensation for any changes to the Compensation instrument s output signal due to internal instrument temperature variations The effects of internal instrument temperature changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature When temperature compensation is on the display shows the current internal instrument temperature measured by a thermistor on the Interface board When temperature compensation is off the display shows the factory standard temperature of 25 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Temperature Compensation Pressure Pressure compensation provides compensation for any changes to the Compensation instrument s output signal due to reaction chamber pr
174. he Choose Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can be sent via streaming data Choices are Concentrations Corrected Concentrations if the O2 compensation option is enabled Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low range concentrations Rang Status is visible only in auto range mode O2 is visible only if the O2 compensation option is enable e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Concentrations The Corrected Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low range concentrations This screen is only displayed if the O2 compensation option is enabled Model A
175. ic meter mg m are available The mg m gas concentration mode is calculated using a standard pressure of 760 mmHg and a standard temperature of 20 C When switching from ppm to mg m the analog ranges all default to the highest range in that mode For example when switching from mg m to ppm all the ranges default to 20000 ppm Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Gas Units Note If the units change from ppm to mg m or vice versa the instrument should be re calibrated particularly if the user s standard temperature is different from 20 C A display warning will appear that ranges will be defaulted and calibration parameters reset A ERED CH Bet Ebb Eesi ar ini DRIeIWKSIS IV al Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Range Menu CO Range 3 14 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual The CO Range screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example a CO range of 0 50 ppm restricts the analog output to concentrations between 0 and 50 ppm The display shows the current CO range The next line of the display is used to change the range The range screen is similar for the single dual and auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words High or Low displayed to indicate which range is displayed The following example shows the CO range
176. id Drive Output 8 Relay 1 Contact b Relay 2 Contact b Relay 3 Contact b Relay 4 Contact b Relay 5 Contact b Relay 6 Contact b Relay 7 Contact b Relay 8 Contact b Relay 9 Contact b Relay 10 Contact b 24V Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 31 24V 32 24V 33 24V 34 24V 35 24V 36 24V 37 24V Table 6 8 Pre amp Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Signal Description Label OUT Preamp Signal Output SH Ground for Shield BLK Ground GRN SPI Data Out ORG SPI CLK VIO SPI CS BLU 15V BRN 5V RED 18V for IR Source WHT 100V BLK 18V for IR Source YEL IR Source Return YEL IR Detector Return RED IR Detector Cooler BLK IR Detector Cooler WHT IR Detector WHT IR Detector Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Service Locations Service For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors Locations worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International 6 20 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 48
177. igital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings eal 3 48 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Logic State Instrument Action Analog Output Configuration Select Channel Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed eo OUS porr CO mpini PPP L mild E The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is assigned to the selected digital input The zero span and purge modes are only present if the zero span valve option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configura
178. ime any major disassembly of components is performed In order to achieve data of the highest confidence it is suggested that periodic zero and air span checks be performed These checks can be performed by Periodically challenging the instrument with zero air The output of the zero air supply should be greater than the flow demand of the instrument In addition an atmospheric dump bypass should be utilized to ensure that the zero air gas flow is being delivered at atmospheric pressure Record the response in percent of scale as Ao Compute the zero drift from the following equation Zero Drift Ao Z Where Z is the recorder response obtained at the last calibration for zero air scale Periodically challenging the instrument with a CO level of approximately 80 of the URL The 80 URL level may be obtained by dilution of a higher level of CO using a system similar to that of Figure 4 1 or by using a low level cylinder of CO containing CO in air at a concentration of approximately 80 of the URL In either case the cylinder of CO should be checked against an SRM or CRM It should also be true for a cylinder of low level CO The Quality Assurance Handbook should be referred to for the cylinder checking procedure Compute the span error from the following equation a CO Concentration Actual CO een 100 EEN Actual CO Concentration Thermo Fisher Scientific HI and LO Multi Point Calibration Default Coefficie
179. imeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 14 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears 3 Dress to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing The Set Analog Outputs screen appears Dress E to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Dress to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 8 Press ER to reset the analog outputs to normal te Current Outputs f Analog Voltage Inputs Analog Voltage Outputs S Figure 7 14 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins Thermo Fisher Scientifi
180. ins the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Request Function Code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function Code Exception Code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2 x N N N or N Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register Value Hi 10 Register Value Lo 10 Register Value Hi 11 Register Value Lo 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register Value Hi 12 0x00 Register Value Lo 12 0x64 Register Value Hi 13 0x00 Register Value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of regist
181. ion Instrument Controls Menu a pruni Ph dm To TO pH Otto PrP L Ea E E a L p Select Srec Lrec The Select Srec Lrec screen is used to select the log record type for other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Srec Lrec View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data by the number of records or by date and time Note that both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time only the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data ERED E Py Tite fel ENEH Tiii ii Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the number of records to view ending with the most recent It also shows the total number of records that have been logged for the selected record type Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 Jan 2009 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 Jan 2009 10 01 ERE ES CH Pi Ta TH ithe IRNIeIWKSIS EY L
182. iptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Descriptor 3 54 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu DRIeIWKSIS DZ Le Lo A CO mri Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Units ERED CHA Bet EPP Eeri Liv mT WH mpini Us EI E ef kees TT kA LA AS H Fe Et Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Decimal Places CREE RE Te CO mr ivt E PURE TE Aad foose PEO kel he ot Bech beet ate Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the analog inpu
183. itor 054 00 Motherboard to Front Panel Board 1035 00 DC Power Supply AC Input 1033 00 AC from Receptacle 1377 00 AC to Power Switch 0 0 0 0 101 0 0 0 0 1267 00 Fan Power Cable 104686 00 Cable 02 Sensor optional External Device fable 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for Connection instrument connecting external devices such as PCs and data loggers to an iSeries Components Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Part Number 102562 00 Description Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard 7 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 103084 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M included with optional 1 0 Expansion Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components Pressure Transducer Pump Motor and Wheel Assy Flow Transducer IR Source Cover Optical Bench H Detector Assy and Pre Amp 02 Sensor Thermistor Optional
184. its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press Items displayed are determined by the options installed The zero span check and auto calibration screens are visible only if the zero span check or auto calibration options are enabled The O2 Concentration Alarm menu item is only displayed if the internal O sensor option is installed The motherboard status interface board status and I O Expansion board status Thermo Fisher Scientific Internal Temperature Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu if installed indicate that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 47 C If the internal temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum internal temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum internal temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp gt Min or Max Model
185. k Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration Send mb read registers 5 4 Receive mb read registers 5 4 552629 000000 55998800 000000 set mb write coil coil state coil index of coil to be set state 1 or 0 This command sets the current state of the MODBUS coil coil digital input coil has an offset of 100 that is the first write coil is address 101 Send set mb write coil 104 1 Receive set mb write coil 104 1 ok dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in oxff7f din channel This command reports the action assigned to the digital input channel and the index number of the corresponding active state The following example reports input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of analog outputs to zero with the active state being high Send din 5 Receive din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 12 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use the list var din command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions The following example sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low to high transition Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index numbe
186. l EE 6 5 Connector Pin Descriptions nsii eniin aiy 6 7 Service Locations seniti edipa eae aea 6 20 Chapter 7 SMG MING EE 7 1 Safety Precautions EE 7 3 Firmware Updates icci scscsijettinalsintiactacthiacceledisaciadtvaceaentagdacsteiduentineeas 7 4 Accessing the eelere eege Ee 7 4 x Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Replacement EE 7 4 Cable E 7 6 External Device Connection Component sccssesseseeeeeereeseeeeneeaees 7 6 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Engler AE EE 7 8 F sse Replacements EE 7 9 Fan Filter Replacement osese aei a Oa eh 7 10 IR Source Eeer EE 7 11 Filter Wheel Replacements ains cvstiacesteceetieanceiacnstiandsn 7 12 Chopper Motor Replacement s s sssesssessssssssssrsrsrsrsrsrsesesrerrererererses 7 14 Optical Bench Replacement eege eet Dees 7 15 Optical Switch EE 7 16 Bench Heater Assembly Replacement wai cece Geach weet 7 17 Detector Preamplifier Assembly Repl ecement 7 18 Preamp Board Calibration cies secscts tirteh aisha esate Sa cet Neate ened 7 20 Pump Replacement 2c1cciciiaguesd tiene ai aE 7 20 Pressure Transducer Replacements cna etre ad 7 21 Pressure Transducer Calibrations csshe Sisacsesadsastesantncusancsstendasstbenctasnes 7 22 Flow Transducer Replacement s 3 2 0 cice Sf ee 7 24 Flow Transducer Calibration eege deeg gur 7 25 Capillary Cleaning or Replacement wii ccscstsaceietiesducntt
187. l Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 36 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual custom range range 1 2 3 This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1 2 or 3 The following example reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5 50 ppm Send custom 1 Receive custom 1 5 500E 3 ppm set custom range range value set custom 1 range value set custom 2 range value set custom 3 range value These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1 2 or 3 to range value where value is a floating point number representing concentration in ppm or mg m The following example sets the custom 1 range to 55 5 ppm Send set custom 1 range 55 5 Receive set custom 1 range 55 5 ok range mode This command reports the current range mode Send range mode Receive range mode single set range mode mode This command sets the current range mode to single dual or auto The following example sets the range mode to single Send set range mode single Receive set range mode single ok gas mode This command reports the current state of the zero span valves gas mode as sample zero or span The following example reports that the gas mode is sample Send gas mode Receive gas mode sample set sample This command sets the zero span valves to the sample mode The following example sets the instrument to sample mode that is the inst
188. l communication Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt RS 232 485 Sel Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument identification number ID The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more of instruments of the same model are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 487 High Level has a default instrument ID of 48 For more information about the Instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Gesytec Serial No Communication Protocol 3 38 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual A Gesytec serial number is included in the response to a Gesytec protocol DA command Refer to Data Sampling Data Query Command DA on page D 4 for detailed information and examples A Gesytec serial number defaults to zero e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrume
189. l is organized into the following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principles of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setup and startup the analyzer Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven firmware Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment
190. l outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below For details of the Model 487 High Level MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification VI Ia MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 77 ors Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS AD
191. ld the connecting rod at a slight angle until the threads are started Spin the diaphragm on until it is snug then lift and grip the edges of the diaphragm at 7 and 2 o clock and tighten firmly using both hands DO NOT use tools Tip If the pump is loose and not mounted position and hold the pump with the motor shaft vertical when starting the threaded diaphragm stud into the connecting rod This helps to prevent the small parts from falling off the stud 2 Turn the fan until the diaphragm is flat across mid point of the stroke With the diaphragm centered over the compressor housing firmly seat the diaphragm edge into the compressor housing groove 3 Place the clean bottom plate onto the compressor housing using the reference mark made earlier to ensure the correct orientation Then place the new flapper on top of the intermediate plate 4 Place the clean top plate on top of the bottom plate using the reference mark made earlier to ensure the correct orientation Tighten the four top plate screws snugly in a diagonal pattern and then tighten to a maximum torque of 6 7 inch lbs Turn the fan by hand to confirm that the pump turns freely 5 Replace the compressor housing cover and gasket Install the four cover screws No not over tighten 5 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding For older models use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5 3
192. librate Flow Zero screen appears Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize and then press to save the zero flow value Reconnect the pump cable to the AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board Connect a calibrated flow sensor at the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel Press ro return to the Flow Sensor Cal screen At the Flow Sensor Cal screen press to select Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen appears Wait at least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize use and to enter the flow sensor reading and press to save the value Install the cover i i Use the following procedure to clean or replace the capillary Figure 7 13 Capillary Cleanin he following proced place the capillary Fig or Replacement Equipment Required 7 26 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Wrench 5 8 inch Capillary Capillary cleaning wire smaller than 0 015 inch Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Zero Span and Sample Solenoid Valve Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Optional Zero Span and Sample Solenoid Valve Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the capillary from the inlet elbow fitting on the pump head
193. line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 NO 21f Code_ 0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code_7 Code_8 Code_9 Code_10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value is the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode Zen This is a line which has a title of Model and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zero index value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to
194. ll be used and reported as the current address A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The following example shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 9 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 9 The following example sets the reply termination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive set format 01 ok Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 44 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 lt CR gt 01 lt NL gt sum xxxx lt CR gt where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string The following example reports the host name is set to iSeries This command returns bad cmd if no host name has been set Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters with no spaces The following example sets the host name to analyzer01 This command returns bad cmd if no host name has been set Send set host name analyzero1 Receive set host name analyzero1
195. lt the two CO analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 2 for channels and pin connections Single range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 78 O 0000000000000000 00 oO000000000000000000 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 CO Analog Output 2 33 3 CO Analog Output 3 15 5 None 4 34 7 None 5 17 9 None 6 36 1 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu Dual Range Mode 3 10 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual In the dual range mode there are two independent analog outputs These are labeled simply as the High Range and the Low Range Each channel has its own analog output range averaging time and span coefficient This enables the sample concentration reading to be sent to the analog outputs at two different ranges For example the low CO analog output can be set to output concentrations from 0 to 50 ppm and the high CO analog output set to output concentrations from 0 to 100 ppm
196. lt nae aa tote tc 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Bata EE 2 8 TEE tee EEN 2 9 DEG 3 1 IR ON 3 1 Peis DCO E 3 2 Ke 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry Screen dE 3 4 ene 3 4 Power Up Screen nienn eaea ea i e a a i 3 6 RUNSTEN EE 3 6 Custo R n Eegeregie 3 7 Mam Menia eege ee eebe 3 8 Range Ment ebe EE 3 8 Single Rance Wade qos ago tec Shy tet hha ee ea 3 9 Dual Range Dh an oh scan ne Eege eee 3 10 Auto Range Mode xia souemsgeugandgettugem asgergeraeiugsuerstgte deeg gecN 3 11 Enge heet e 3 13 Eau 3 14 KT 3 15 E 3 15 Averagino KE 3 15 Calibration WE 3 16 CO Backeround inireseta iseia aane na 3 17 CO EE 3 18 Oy Backoround E 3 18 KEE 3 19 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual v Contents vi Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Reset User Calibration Defaults cccssssscssscscssscscssseecsssceeese 3 20 Calibratio tt EE 3 20 Calibrate CO Bac lee oui EN 3 21 Calibrate COC ebe Eegenen eegenen 3 21 7 STOPS Pat ee 3 22 ENEE 3 22 Period EE 3 23 T ta D ration EH 3 23 Zero Span Purge Duration Minutes Segoe deg Eed 3 23 Zero Span E 3 24 Zero Span E NEE 3 24 EE 3 24 Calibrate O Background DEE 3 25 Calibrate Oz GetiClen EE 3 25 Instrument Controls elteren 3 25 Datalogging Settings daten 3 26 KEE 3 27 View Logged e EE 3 27 Number of R ECOL EE 3 27 REN 3 28 Erase Kette 3 29 eege e eg 3 29 Choose EE WE EEN 3 29 Concentrations sensie iseer edirss iiaa iii anaa oii iaeia 3 30 Corrected Concentrations esssessseseseesserssres
197. lue where value is a floating point number representing agc intensity alarm limits The following example sets the agc intensity alarm maximum value to 20 Send set alarm agc intensity max 20 Receive set alarm agc intensity max 20 ok alarm bias voltage min alarm bias voltage max These commands report the bias voltage alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the bias voltage alarm minimum value is 128 Send alarm bias voltage min Receive alarm bias voltage min 128 set alarm bias voltage min value set alarm bias voltage max value These commands set the bias voltage alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing bias voltage alarm limits The following example sets the bias voltage alarm maximum value to 110 Send set alarm bias voltage max 110 Receive set alarm bias voltage max 110 ok alarm chamber temp min alarm chamber temp max These commands report the bench temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the bench temperature alarm minimum value is 35 0 C Send alarm chamber temp min Receive alarm chamber temp min 35 0 deg C Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms set alarm chamber temp min value set alarm chamber temp max value These commands set the bench temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value wher
198. lue is the number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input Ifa is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Examples C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line n This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also MOT but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this
199. lue of 10K ohms at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10K resistor to the thermistor input AMB Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement UO Expansion Board Optional Replacement A 7 34 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual TEMP on the measurement interface board and enter the temperature reading A A 1 C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable A 3 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration The Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e gt Jand EI E to enter the known temperature and press to save the temperature value 5 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board Figure 7 15 Note After replacing the optional I O expansion board calibrate the current outputs and the analog voltage inputs See Analog Output Calibration on page 7 30 and Analog Input Calibration on page 7 31 in this chapter A Equipment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be
200. mands will set the CO background The following example shows a successful auto calibration of the CO background Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration Note Zero air must be provided to the instrument prior to issuing any of these commands A Send set cal co bkg Receive set cal co bkg ok cal bkg 02 This command will set O background so the O concentration reads 0 00 The example below shows a successful auto calibration of the O2 background Send set cal bkg 02 Receive set cal bkg 02 ok set cal co coef set cal high co coef set cal low co coef set span calibrate set calibrate These commands will set CO coefficients based on CO span gas concentrations The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The following example shows a successful auto calibration of the low CO coefficient Note Span gas must be provided to the instrument prior to issuing any of these commands A Send set cal low CO coef Receive set cal low CO coef ok cal coef 02 This command will set O2 coefficient based on O2 span gas concentrations The example below shows a successful auto calibration of the O2 coefficient Send set cal coef 02 Receive set cal coef oi ok co coef high co coef low co coef These commands report the current CO coefficient in single range mode
201. may be impaired A Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement Parts Cleaning the Outside Case Cleaning the Optics 5 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts and the associated replacement procedures WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the labels on the case Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Best results are obtained when the optics are cleaned prior to calibration The cleanliness of the mirrors should be checked any time the AGC intensity is below 200 000 Hz since one cause of low output is light attenuation due to dirt on the mirrors Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see
202. ment Remove the cover Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the P 8 partition panel that connect to the measurement interface board Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from front Remove one screw from the bottom rear of the case Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables Re install the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the fuses Equipment Required Replacement fuses 250VAC 3 Amp SlowBlow for 100VAC and 110VAC models 250VAC 1 60 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC models Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord Remove fuse drawer located on the AC power connector If either fuse is blown replace both fuses Insert fuse drawer and reconnect power cord Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Fan Filter Replacement Fan Filter Replacement A 7 10 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the fan and the fan filter Figure 7 Equipme
203. motor plate and remove the IR source cover Figure 7 5 3 Loosen both clamp screws from the IR source mounting posts and remove IR source 4 Install a new IR source by following the previous steps in reverse Ensure that the IR source element is evenly spaced between the mounting posts Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Filter Wheel Replacement SEMS Nuts 4 ID Brass Connectors 2 Washers 2 IR Source Cover EI D Ga Cover Screws 2 y ge Clamp Screws 2 SS IR Source Mounts Motor Plate GC es gl Filter Wheel Figure 7 5 Replacing the IR Source Fi Iter Wh eel Use the following procedure to replace the filter wheel Replacement Equipment Required Filter wheel Allen wrenches 5 32 inch and 5 64 inch Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 7 12 Model Ap High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Filter Wheel Replacement 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the chopper motor and wheel assembly by removing the three motor plate Allen screws holding the motor plate to the optical bench Figure 7 6 Motor Mount Screws 4 Motor Plate Screws
204. mperature Limits ese eeseeeereeeees 3 69 erch Rein peracetic ea eas teak te eaten SA 3 70 Min and Max Bench Temperature Limits s222 5 Sergh atugestege g s 3 70 tee 3 70 Min and Max Pressure Limits yo ctaccdsabaececexevctcararitacezntiancetenSn 3 71 Sample Flow zic ciiacusiennwidliseinutline EEA EEEE S RI a 3 71 Min and Max Sample Flow EE 3 72 Bias Ee 3 72 Min and Max Bias Voltage Limits ees 3 72 AGC Intensity EE 3 73 Min and Max AGC Intensity Limits scccscasccsetivessersvtncosedtsencssedatins 3 73 Motor Speed EE 3 73 Poet and Spad CCC lees cscs hc stsa tase che inen eaea ENN 3 74 Max Zeto and Spam EE 3 74 Zero and Span Auto EE 3 74 Concentration a R A 3 75 Min and Max Concentration Limits caiccrsccct usecase deen 3 75 Min Trigger Concentrationtiis sieve ssacsousesvacsetibdnassetibacesiaisiesstanveds 3 76 Op Comcen tration siinses EEN 3 76 Min and Max O Concentration Limits 2 psccaccegcandiecstecessteattertere 3 76 Min EE 3 77 External EES 3 77 SERVICE MICH EE 3 78 Range Mode EE 3 78 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Presstite Calibration EE 3 79 Calibrate Pressure er ee EE 3 79 Calibrate Pressure Egeter eene Ee 3 80 Restore Default Pressure Calbraton 3 80 Flow EE 3 81 REI EE 3 81 Calibrate Flow Ee 3 81 Restore Default Flow Caltbeadon EE 3 82 Initial Sample Reference Ratiogistincesetcscteniveancelauinstincy 3 82 Mile Point ebe ett eegene gegr nnte 3 83 Calibrate Point 1s 2 52 derer bere Su 3 83 EE 3 84 IRC TEE 3 84
205. ms to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 7 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 12 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram on page 6 14 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 16 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 17 Pre amp Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 19 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator INTF DATA J1 1 Ground 2 RS485 to Interface Board 3 RS485 to Interface Board 10 BASE T J2 1 Ethernet Output 2 Ethernet Output 3 Ethernet Input 4 NC 5 NC 6 Ethernet Input 7 NC 8 NC EXPANSIONBD J3 1 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Expansion Board 8 RS485 to Expansion Board Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator INTERFACE 24V J4 1 24V 2 Ground 1 0 J5 1 Power Fail Relay N C Contact 2 Digital Ground 3 TTL Input 1 4 TTL Input 2 5 Digital Ground 6 TTL Input 5 7 TTL Input 7 8 TTL Input 8 9 TTL Input 10 10 Ground 11 TTL Input 13 12 TTL Input 15 13 Digital Ground 14 Analog Voltage 1 15 Analog Voltage 3 16 Analog Ground 17 Analog Voltage 5 18 Analog Ground 19 Analog Ground 20 Power Fail Relay COM 21 Power Fail
206. n Manual D 3 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the lt address gt does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode instrument address 5 lt STX gt STO05 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command nitiates a data transfer from the instrument The Query Command instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range DA mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA005 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt SP gt 5 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt
207. n allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until the meter reads the value shown in the set output to field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale 3 86 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibration Analog Input Calibrate Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Operation Service Menu The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog input channels at both zero and full scale The Analog Input Calibration menu is visible only when the I O expansion board is installed The analog input calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal aa ee a The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Service Menu Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale
208. n or off Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 487 High Level The service wrench icon on the status bar is shown when service mode is on For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Date Time The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time Timezone The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Network Time Protocol NTP server This should be set to the timezone that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via the C LINK tz command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT
209. nal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltage 5V Ground Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator SE 5 wo G Wo Wo wo NY NY FA FA FA FP wo N O O ODO N DD Ww Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 4 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Ground Ground Ground Ground 24V 24V RS232 RS485 A P1 A oOo a N on A WW N NC Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN NC RS232 RS485 B gt oOo aoa N oon A WW N NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC IN PI w N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR Thermo Fisher Scientific PJ2 AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator AC INTF BD PJ3 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground Table 6
210. ncentration The display shows the current O2 concentration reading The next line of the display shows the O2 span coefficient that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the O concentration Notice that as the span coefficient value is changed the current O2 concentration reading on the above line also changes However no real changes are made to the value stored in memory until is pressed Only proposed changes as indicated by a question mark prompt are displayed until is pressed Note The concentration value will show ERROR if the measured concentration is not a valid span value either too high or too low A Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Calibration Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt O2 Coefficient Reset User The Reset User Calibration Defaults screen allows the user to reset the Calibration Defaults calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu Calibration Factors gt Reset User Cal Defaults Ai Es PTET cA 2 OED it kerik me DRIeIWKSIS D CO Ota Fi a EO meinas z Lee Calibration The Calibration menu is used to calibrate zero and span The Calibrate O2 Menu Background menu item and the Calibrate O2 Coefficient menu item are displayed only when the internal O2 sensor option is installed The calibration menu is similar for the single dual and auto range mode as shown below The only difference be
211. nd Current Output 1 Current Output Return Current Output 2 Current Output Return D D D D D D D co CO N D CO Es ow Current Output 3 20 Current Output Return 21 Current Output 4 22 Current Output Return 23 Current Output 5 24 Current Output Return 25 Current Output 6 5V 24V 24V MOTHER BD J2 Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Motherboard RS485 to Motherboard CO N oon A O N Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input CO N oon A O N Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 18 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Connector Reference Label Designator Pin Signal Description SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock DIGITAL J2 OUTPUTS oOo aoa N on A WW N D D ch CH D D D gt D D D D co CO N o CO Es 3 N wo N N N N N N N N N NH O O N O Oo FP WO N gt gt Q Relay 1 Contact a Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a Relay 9 Contact a Relay 10 Contact a NC Solenoid Drive Output 1 Solenoid Drive Output 2 Solenoid Drive Output 3 Solenoid Drive Output 4 Solenoid Drive Output 5 Solenoid Drive Output 6 Solenoid Drive Output 7 Soleno
212. nel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The following example reports current output channel 4 is in the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 13 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 13 The following example sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 13 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the following example the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where
213. ngs and normally has a value near 1 000 The CO Coefficient screen enables the CO span coefficient to be manually changed while sampling span gas of known concentration The display shows the current CO concentration reading The next line of the display shows the CO span coefficient that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the CO concentration Notice that as the span coefficient value is changed the current CO concentration reading above also changes However no real changes are made until is pressed In dual or auto range modes HIGH or LOW is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low coefficient The following example shows the coefficient screen in dual auto range mode Note The concentration value will show ERROR if the measured concentration is not a valid span value either higher than the selected range or 0 or lower A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Hi Coef The O Background screen is used to perform a manual zero calibration of the oxygen sensor Before performing a zero calibration allow the analyzer to sample nitrogen until stable readings are obtained The first line of the display shows the current O reading The second line of the display shows the O background correction that is stored in memory The O2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 0 Coefficient Operation Calibration Factors Menu background correction is a value
214. nse Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value 0xCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read Holding Input Registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte conta
215. nt The exact CO concentration is calculated from CO STD X Fco CO CO Jour Fp Feo Noa OU 7 Where CO our diluted CO concentration at the output manifold ppm CO srp concentration of the undiluted CO standard ppm Fco flow rate of CO standard corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg L min Fp flow rate of dilution air corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg L min Allow the instrument to sample this CO concentration standard until a stable response is obtained From the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal Coef The first line of the display shows the current CO concentration reading The second line of the display shows the CO range and the third line is where the CO concentration is entered Enter the CO calibration gas concentration using the pushbuttons and then press to calibrate the CO reading to the CO calibration gas recorder response percent scale CO our x 100 URL Zco Where URL nominal upper range limit of the instrument operating range Zco instrument response to zero air scale Record the CO concentration and the instrument s response Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Periodic Zero and Span Checks Calibration Frequency Periodic Zero and Span Checks 4 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual In order to generate data of the highest confidence it is recommended that a multipoint calibration be performed every three months any t
216. nt Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for serial communications Possible settings are C Link MODBUS Gesytec and Streaming C link Protocol C link is a bi directional protocol that provides access to all instrument functions including reading the various concentrations and other analog values or variables reading the status of the digital outputs of the instrument and triggering or simulating the activation of a digital input to the instrument Refer to Appendix B for detailed C link information Streaming Protocol The streaming protocol provides a one way reporting capability in which data records are exported to a serial device on a regular basis without prompting Gesytec Bayern Hessen protocol The Gesytec Bayern Hessen protocol support for the Model 487 High Level enables the user to read the various concentrations Refer to Appendix D for detailed Gesytec Bayern Hessen information Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu MODBUS protocol The MODBUS protocol is a serial communications protocol that allows for communication between devices connected to the same network The MODBUS protocol support for the Model 487 High Level enables the user to read the various concentrations and other analog values or variables read the status of the digital outputs of the instrument and to trigger or sim
217. nt Required Fan Fan filter Philips screwdriver Adjustable wrench Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component amp Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the fan guard and filter from the rear of the instrument by unsnapping it If the fan is not being replaced install the new filter snap it into place and skip the remaining steps If possible disconnect the fan power cable from the fan otherwise disconnect the cable from the measurement interface board Remove the four fan mounting screws along with nuts and washers and remove the fan Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse order Thermo Fisher Scientific IR Source Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing IR Source Replacement Mounting Screws 4 Filter Figure 7 4 Replacing the Fan Use the following procedure to replace the IR source Figure 7 5 Equipment Required IR Source Flatblade screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the two cover screws holding the IR source cover to the
218. nt and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include External connectors e External Accessory e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors e Ethernet Communications e HO connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors e Function Key Panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board e UO Expansion Board e Digital Output Board e AC Distribution Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Electronics Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors Flow Sensor Assembly Pressure Sensor Assembly 8 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Connectors located on the measurement interface board include Data communication with the motherboard e 24V and 120VAC power supply inputs e Fan and solenoid ou
219. ntration is entered The CO span coefficient is calculated stored and used to correct the current CO reading For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration In dual or auto range modes HIGH or LOW is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low coefficient It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating The longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be To be most accurate use the 300 second averaging time For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal CO Coefficient Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Calibration Menu Zero Span Check The Zero Span Check menu is available only if the zero span valve option is installed It is used to program the instrument to perform fully automated zero and span checks or adjustments e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check Mettet NextTime The Next Time screen is used to view and set the initial date and time 24 hour format of the zero span check Once the initial zero span check is performed the date and time of the next zero span check is calculated and displayed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Next Time DOE D rata Col cited Emma EN Lil LI Org 3 22 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation
220. nts Cal Point 1 2 and 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Adjust Calibration HI and LO Multi Point Calibration 3 Latest copy of the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems should be consulted to determine the level of acceptance of zero and span errors For detailed guidance in setting up a quality assurance program refer to the Code of Federal Regulations and the EPA Handbook on Quality Assurance The instrument can also be calibrated using a dual three point calibration The calibration points are divided into a low range and a high range consisting of three points each e Cal point 1 e Cal point 2 e Cal point 3 The customer defines the ranges and Thermo Fisher Scientific recommends the following calibration points for each range e Cal point 1 80 of range e Cal point 2 50 of range e Cal point 3 20 or range Note If performing a multi point calibration after a bad calibration or changing ranges it is recommended to start off with default values for the Cal point coefficients A To set default values from the Main Menu select Service Mode gt Hi Multi Point Cal or Lo Multi Point Cal From Hi or Lo Multi Point Cal select Default Coef and press The instrument will automatically reset the default values Use the following procedure to adjust cal points 1 2 and 3 1 Adjust the zero air flow and the CO flow from the standard CO cylinder to provide a diluted CO conc
221. ock icon indicates that no parameter changes can be made from gt G A bg The alarm bell E indicates the front panel that an alarm is active The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode The word SAMPLE on the left of the status bar indicates the analyzer has the zero span valve option and is in SAMPLE mode Other modes appear in the same area of the display as ZERO or SPAN For more information about the optional solenoid valves see Chapter 9 Optional Equipment 3 6 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview When operating in dual or auto range mode two sets of coefficients are used to calculate the CO High and Low concentrations Also two averaging times are used one for each range The title bar indicates which range concentrations are displayed The words LOW RANGE CONCENTRATION on the top of the display indicates that the low concentration is displayed In dual range mode pressing the t and arrows will toggle between high and low concentrations The following example shows the Run screen in single range mode Title Bar CORTE Gas Concentraton Gas Units Status Bar E J A 4 Status Bar Icons Wl mid Programmable Soft Key Labels Custom Run Screens Up to five Custom Run Screens can be configured For more information on custom run screens
222. ock and Cable Kits on page 9 5 e Cables on page 9 6 e Mounting Options on page 9 7 With the internal zero span assembly option a source of span gas is connected to the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the ZERO port Zero and span gas should be supplied at atmospheric pressure It may be necessary to use an atmospheric dump bypass plumbing arrangement to accomplish this For more information refer to the Installation chapter and the Operation chapter The Internal Oxygen O2 Sensor option provides a paramagnetic sensor for O2 concentration measurement and CO correction This option allows the user to correct the CO readings for the amount of oxygen in the sample Selectable O2 concentrations can be used as the correction factor Figure 9 1 shows how this option is integrated with the Model 487 High Level with and without the zero span option Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Internal Oxygen 02 Sensor Internal 02 Sensor Calibration 9 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Z4 Figure 9 1 Flow Diagram Internal 02 Sensor This section describes how to calibrate the optional internal O2 sensor Be sure to power the analyzer for half an hour at normal operating conditions with the cover on before calibration The internal O2
223. of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 487 High Level IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 487 High Level Coil Number Status 0 NONE 1 AUTO RANGE 2 LOCAL REMOTE 3 SERVICE 4 UNITS 5 ZERO MODE Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 6 SPAN MODE 7 SAMPLE MODE 8 GEN ALARM 9 CONC MAX ALARM 10 CONC MIN ALARM 11 INTERNAL TEMP ALARM 12 BENCH TEMP ALARM 13 PRESSURE ALARM 14 SAMPLE FLOW ALARM 15 INTENSITY ALARM 16 MOTOR SPEED ALARM 17 BIAS VOLTAGE ALARM 18 MB STATUS ALARM 19 INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM 20 UO EXP BD STATUS ALARM 21 CONC ALARM 22 PURGE MODE 23 NOT USED 24 ZERO CHK CAL ALARM 25 SPAN CHK CAL ALARM 26 NOT USED 27 NOT USED 28 NOT USED 29 NOT USED 30 NOT USED 31 NOT USED
224. ok instr name This command reports the instrument name The following example reports the instrument name for the Model 487 High Level Send instr name Receive instr name CO Analyzer CO Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument identification ID The following example reports the current setting of the instrument ID Send instrument id Receive instrument id 48 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument id to value where value is an integer between 0 and 127 inclusive The following example shows the instrument ID changed to 50 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note Note sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new id for subsequent commands A Send set instrument id 50 Receive set instrument id 50 ok mode This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in local service or remote The following example shows that the instrument is in the remote mode Send mode Receive mode remote set mode local set mode remote These commands set the instrument to local or remote mode The following example sets the instrument to the local mode Send set mode local Receive set mode local ok allow mode cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting 1 allow set mode local and set mode remote commands 0 ignore set mode local or
225. om an ASCII erec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically A The second line of the layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been pa
226. on 2 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material Figure 2 1 Remove Packing 2 pieces Remove Packing 2 pieces Units without Optional 1 0 Board Units with Optional 1 0 Board Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 4 Remove the three shipping screws Figure 2 2 AO ee Shipping Screws 3 Figure 2 2 Removing the Shipping Screws 2 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Setup Procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup Procedure 5 Check for possible damage during shipment 6 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached 7 Re install the cover 8 Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior Use the following procedure to setup the instrument 1 Connect the sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel Figure 2 3 Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty wet or incompatible materials All tubing should be constructed of Teflon 316 stainless steel borosilicate glass or similar tubing with an OD of 1 4 inch and a minimum ID of 1 8 inch The length of the tubing should be less than 10 feet Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument free of particulates It may be necessary to use the Teflon particulate filter as described in Teflon Particulate Filter on page 9 5 A Note Gas must be delivered to the
227. on Hardware Configuration B 38 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual temp comp This command reports whether temperature compensation is on or off The following example shows the temperature compensation is off Send temp comp Receive temp comp off set temp comp onoff onoff on off These commands turn the temperature compensation on or off The following example turns temperature compensation off Send set temp comp off Receive set temp comp off ok oc o2 corr These command report whether oxygen correction compensation is on or off The following example reports that the Oz correction is on Send 02 corr Receive 02 corr on set oc onoff set 02 corr onoff onoff on off These commands turn the oxygen correction compensation on or off The following example turns the O2 correction off Send set oc off Receive set oc off ok contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The following example shows the screen contrast is 50 according to Table B 8 Send contrast Receive contrast 10 50 set contrast evel This command sets the screen s level of contrast according to Table B 8 The following example sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 10 Receive set contrast 10 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Table B 8 Contrast Levels
228. on Retaining Screws 2 Pressure Transducer Calibration 7 22 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Disconnect plumbing from the pressure transducer assembly Figure 7 2 Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection Disconnect the pressure transducer from the PRES connector on the measurement interface board Remove the two pressure transducer assembly retaining screws and remove the pressure transducer assembly Figure 7 11 Figure 7 11 Replacing the Pressure Transducer To install the pressure transducer assembly follow the previous steps in reverse Calibrate the pressure transducer Refer to the Flow Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer Note An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration Therefore if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump only adjust the span setting A A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the current baromet
229. on Manual 4 1 Calibration Equipment Required Compression Drying Scrubbing Flow Meter s and Controller s Pressure Regulator for CO Standard Cylinder 4 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual molecules If water vapor is not removed it might be necessary to correct the flow measurement data when calculating the dilution ratio of the span CO reference A platinum on alumina catalyst operated at 250 C has been found to be a convenient oxidizer to convert CO to CO3 If a zero air source is required the following interferant removal methods are recommended e Compression e Drying e Oxidation e Scrubbing The zero air source should be at an elevated pressure to allow accurate and reproducible flow control and to aid in subsequent operations such as drying oxidation and scrubbing An air compressor that gives an output of 10 psig is usually sufficient for most applications Several drying methods are available Passing the compressed air through a bed of silica gel using a heatless air dryer or removing water vapor with a permeation dryer are three possible approaches The last step in the generation of the zero air is the removal of the remaining contaminants by either further reaction or absorption Fixed bed reactors are usually employed In order to obtain an accurate dilution ratio in the dilution method used for calibration the flow rates must be regulated to 1 and be measured to an accuracy of
230. oncentration in percent The following example reports that the current O2 concentration is 15 Send oi Receive 02 15 00 o2 corr conc This command reports the oxygen correction concentration in percent The following example shows that the O2 correction concentration is 15 Send 02 corr conc Receive oi corr conc 15 00 set o2 corr conc value value 0 to 20 9 This command sets the oxygen correction concentration value to value where value is a floating point number representing the oxygen correction concentration in percent The following example sets the O2 corrected concentration value to 15 00 Send set oi corr conc 15 Receive set oi corr conc 15 ok flow This command reports the current sample flow The following example reports that the current sample flow is 1 108 liters minute Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements B 12 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Send flow Receive flow 1 108 1 m chamber temp This command reports the current optical bench temperature The following example reports that the current optical bench temperature is 45 2 C Send chamber temp Receive chamber temp 45 2 deg C internal temp This command reports the current internal instrument temperature The first reading is the temperature being used in instrument calculations The second temperature is the actual temperature being measured If temperature compensation is
231. oose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Run Screen 1 5 OPER EEE i Edit Title The Edit Title screen is used to edit the contents of the title bar on the selected Custom Run screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt select a Run Screen gt Edit Title ERED CH Pi Tam tH Ob IRNIeIWKSIS EY Led La de POE Se sed Pi DEE EE Enabled The Enabled screen is used to toggle the selected custom Run screen On or Off When a Run screen is On it will be displayed when using _ 7 to scroll through the available Run screen displays When a Run screen is OFF it will be skipped when scrolling through the Run screen displays For example if Run screens 2 and 3 are set to Off scrolling down through the available Run screen displays will display only Run screens 1 4 and 5 Note You cannot scroll through Run screens when a menu screen is displayed A 3 90 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt select a Run Screen gt Enabled Number of Items The Number of Items menu selection is used to set the number of instrument readings to display on the custom Run screen A maximum of 10 items can be displayed on the Run screen A Run screen configured for 5 items or less displays the items in the large font a Run screen with 6 10 items displays the items in the small font e Inthe Main
232. or the high and low range coefficient in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The following example reports that the CO coefficient is 1 200 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 28 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Send CO coef Receive CO coef 1 200 set co coef value set high co coef value set low co coef value These commands set the CO coefficients to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the CO coefficient to 1 200 Send set CO coef 1 200 Receive set CO coef 1 200 ok coef o2 This command reports the O2 coefficient The example below reports that the O coefficient is 1 000 Send coef oi Receive coef 02 1 000 set coef o2 value This command sets the Oz coefficient to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The example below sets the O coefficient to 1 005 Send set coef oi 1 005 Receive set coef 02 1 005 ok coef 0 coef 1 coef 2 high coef 0 high coef 1 high coef 2 low coef 0 low coef 1 low coef 2 The coef 0 coef 1 and coef 2 commands report the coefficients of the curve developed from the Hi Multi Point Calibration in single range mode The high coef 0 high coef 1 and high coef 2 commands report the coefficients o
233. or wrong power configuration Main fuse is blown or missing Bad switch or wiring connection Action Check the line to confirm that power is available and that it matches the voltage and frequency configuration of the instrument Unplug the power cord open the fuse drawer on the back panel and check the fuses visually or with a multimeter Unplug the power cord disconnect the switch and check operation with a multimeter Pressure transducer does not hold calibration or is noisy Run output noisy Analyzer does not calibrate properly Pressure transducer defective Recorder noise Sample CO concentration varying Foreign material in optical bench System leak Pressure or temperature transducer out of calibration Dirty system Leaky correlation wheel Replace pressure transducer Replace or repair recorder Run instrument on a span CO source if quiet there is no malfunction Clean optical bench Find and repair leak Recalibrate pressure and temperature transducer Clean cells and flow components Replace with a known good wheel Analog test ramp Faulty recorder D A calibration off Replace recorder Re calibrate the D A witha DMV known to be in calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Alarm Internal Temp Possible Cause Check fan operation Check fan filter Troubleshooting Troublesho
234. oting Guides Action Replace fan if not operating properly Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Alarm Chamber Temp Chamber temperature below set point of 50 C Check 10K ohm thermistor replace if bad Check temperature control board to insure the LEDs are coming on If not temperature control board could be defective Alarm Pressure High pressure indication Check the pump for a tear in the diaphragm replace with pump repair kit if necessary Refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check that capillaries are properly installed and O rings are in good shape Replace if necessary Check flow system for leaks Alarm Flow Alarm Bias voltage Flow low Defective measurement interface board Defective pre amp board Check sample capillary 0 015 inch ID for blockage Replace as necessary If using sample particulate filter make sure It is not blocked Disconnect sample particulate filter from the sample bulkhead if flow increases replace the filter Replace measurement interface board Replace pre amp board Alarm AGC intensity Thermo Fisher Scientific Pre amp Gain not set properly Defective measurement interface board Check Gain adjustment Replace measurement interface board Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides
235. ource A chopper disk that rotates along with the wheel periodically interrupts the radiation to create a modulated signal The infrared source is a special wire wound resistor operated at high temperature to create infrared radiation The pre amplifier assembly is mounted on the optical bench along with an infrared detector that detects the energy of the infrared light passing through the optical bench It amplifies the pulsating signal from the infrared detector The sample flow sensor located at the optical bench outlet measures the flow of sample through the optical bench The pressure transducer measures the pressure of the sample gas The capillary and the pump control the sample gas flow The pump draws the sample gas through the optical filter bench The purge flow switch monitors the flow of purge gas when the filter wheel purge gas option is installed The processor firmware tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument control e Monitoring signals e Measurement calculations e Output communication Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Firmware Instrument Control Monitoring Signals Output Communication 8 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls th
236. p must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the oxygen sensor ribbon cable 3 Disconnect all plumbing connections from the oxygen sensor 4 Loosen the four captive screws holding the converter to the floor plate and move it to the front of the case 5 Loosen the three captive screws holding the oxygen sensor to the floor plate and remove the oxygen sensor 6 Install new oxygen sensor by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 15 Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Motherboard Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Motherboard Replacement Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 34 Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 16 Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove the board
237. p field 1 5 Receive set sp field 1 5 ok Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 26 Calibration Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual stream per This command reports the current time interval in seconds for streaming data The following example reports the streaming period is set to 10 seconds Send stream per Receive stream per 10 set stream per number value number value 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The following example sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to Table B 6 The following example reports that the streaming data shall not include a time stamp Send stream time Receive stream time 0 set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 6 The following example attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time 0 Receive set stream time O ok Table Rp Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 0 Disables time stamp to streaming data string 1 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string set cal co bkg set zero calibrate These com
238. period 1 to 300 seconds during which CO measurements are taken The average concentration of the readings are calculated for that time period The front panel display and analog outputs are updated every 10 seconds for averaging times between 10 and 300 seconds For averaging times of 1 2 and 5 seconds the front panel display and analog outputs are updated every second An averaging time of 10 seconds for example means that the average concentration of the last 10 seconds will be output at each update An averaging time of 300 seconds means that the moving average concentration of the last 300 seconds will Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Calibration Factors Menu Calibration Factors Menu 3 16 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual be output at each update Therefore the lower the averaging time the faster the front panel display and analog outputs respond to concentration changes Longer averaging times are typically used to smooth output data The Averaging Time screen for the single range mode is shown below In the dual and auto range modes an Averaging Time Menu is displayed before the averaging time screens This menu is needed because the dual and auto range modes have two averaging times high and low The Averaging Time screen functions the same way in the single dual and auto range modes The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e
239. planation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens Press to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen JC J up Down The four arrow pushbuttons t 1 A 1 Land e a Left Right gt _ move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions The soft keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The function of the soft keys is to provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assi
240. posed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below This screen is only displayed if the O2 compensation option is enabled e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Corrected Concentrations Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Chr COOL r TT Cor K JA GC Oo Ota Rri Taic ii Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements i i ECKE CH ciinii et Pir i Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the parameter none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selecte
241. power to the bench heater resistors to maintain a constant bench temperature The pre amp board assembly amplifies the signal from an infrared sensor that receives light passing through the sample gas The preamplifier gain is adjusted by the main processor to bring the signal amplitude within a normal operating range The output of the pre amp board is fed to the measurement interface board Wires from the pre amp board apply power to the infrared source resistor The pre amp board assembly is mounted on top of the optical bench The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Eight solenoid driver outputs open collector are provided along with a corresponding 24VDC supply pin on the connector The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage signals and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of OV tol0VDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA The front panel connector board interfaces between
242. pper motor cable from the MOT DRY connector on the measurement interface board and disconnect the detector cable from the PREAMP cable connector on the measurement interface board Disconnect the plumbing connections from the optical bench Remove the four screws holding the optical bench to the shock mounts and carefully remove the optical bench Replace the optical bench by following the previous steps in reverse Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Optical Switch Replacement Shock Mounts 4 Standoffs 4 U Figure 7 7 Replacing the Optical Bench Optical Switch Use the following procedure to replace the optical switch Figure 7 8 Replacement Equipment Required Optical switch Flatblade screwdriver 1 4 inch and 3 16 inch Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the optical bench following the Optical Bench Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Turn the optical bench over remove the two screws securing the optical switch assembly to the case and remove the optical switch 4 Install the new optical switch by following the previous
243. product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 41 Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows e Hardware on page 8 1 e Firmware on page 8 3 e Electronics on page 8 5 e I O Components on page 8 8 Hardware Model 48 High Level hardware components Figure 8 1 include e Optical bench e Band pass filter e Bench heater board e Chopper motor e Optical pickup e Gas filter wheel e Infrared source e Pre amplifier assembly with IR detector e Sample flow sensor e Pressure transducer e Capillary e Pump e Purge flow switch optional Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description Hardware Pressure Transducer Motor and Wheel Assy Pump Flow Transducer Optical Bench IH Fan IS IR Source Cover Detector Assy and Pre Amp 02 Sensor Thermistor gt i 7 s e Optional DEL gt 7 mo SO pe rt 7 agoen e i ees e 1 0 Expansion Board Opt z i L i J NSS Digital Output Board Front Panel Board
244. r output variable and the active state assigned to digital output channel The following example reports output 4 to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of general alarm Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open B 50 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel 1 10 to be assigned to the action associated with index 1 34 and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding state The following example sets the digital output channel 4 to state 11 Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This command reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters according to Table B 15 The following example shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 a Note All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Table B 15 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments DtoA Function Single Range Dual Range Auto Ran
245. red Chopper motor Allen wrenches 5 32 inch and 5 64 inch Flatblade screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Disconnect the chopper motor power cable from the MOT DRV connector on the measurement interface board 2 Follow the directions for Filter Wheel Replacement procedure up to and including Step 3 3 Remove the chopper motor from the motor plate by removing the two screws that hold it to the motor plate 4 Install the new chopper motor by following the previous steps in reverse 5 Install the filter wheel on the motor shaft make sure that the set screw seats on the flat of the motor shaft and tighten the set screw 6 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Optical Bench Replacement Optical Bench Use the following procedure to replace the optical bench Figure 7 7 Replaceme Nt Equipment Required Optical bench Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A l Thermo Fisher Scientific Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Disconnect the cho
246. rewdriver 2 f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 7 20 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Transducer Replacement 2 Disconnect the pump power cable from the AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 Remove both lines from the pump 4 Loosen the four captive screws holding the pump bracket to the shock mounts and remove the pump assembly and the shock mounts 5 Invert the pump assembly remove the two pump mounting screws located on the bottom side of the pump bracket and remove the bracket from the pump 6 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse 7 Perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Pump Bracket _ Captive Screws 4 gt a e Shock Mounts 4 Floor Plate Pump Mounting Screws 2 Bottom Figure 7 10 Replacing the Pump Pressure Transducer Use the following procedure to replace the pressure transducer Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Pressure transducer Philips screwdriver 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibrati
247. rformance This is produced by feeding a purge gas to the rear panel bulkhead at a constant pressure of 15 psig A 0 006 inch glass capillary green will deliver the required 140cc min purge flow Flows greater than this are not recommended due to unstable cooling effects on the IR source Lower flows are acceptable as long as the purge housing is adequately purged for the application A 5 10 micron pore size two inch diameter Teflon element is available for the Model 487 High Level This filter should be installed just prior to the SAMPLE bulkhead When using a filter all calibrations and span checks must be performed through the filter The I O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board Refer to Terminal Board PCB Assemblies on page 2 5 for information on attaching the cable to the connector board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors
248. ric pressure from the local weather station or airport and comparing it to the pressure reading However since these pressures are usually corrected to sea level it may be necessary to correct the reading to local pressure by subtracting 0 027 mmHg per foot of altitude A Do not attempt to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known accurately A Equipment Required Vacuum pump WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mmHg 3 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration The Pressure Sensor Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 At the Pressure Sensor Cal screen press to select Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing Flow Transducer Replacement 7 24 Flow Transdu
249. rizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A 7 40 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Service Locations Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following the previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set screen constrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A Service Locations For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for
250. rrors Comp is the corrected concentration CO COR that may be used for analog outputs or datalogging The O2 CONC line shows the measured Oz concentration if the compensation is on or the correction Oz concentration if it is off Comp O2 cor C e Inthe Main Menu choose gt Instrument Controls gt O2 Compensation Thermo Fisher Scientific Screen Contrast Service Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 100 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature A Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another If the LCD is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A Note If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See contrast levels in Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands for more information on this command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode o
251. rsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the erec layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two Thermo Fisher Scientific Text Value String Value Source Alarm Information Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a erec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value sourc
252. rument is reading the sample gas Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Send set sample Receive set sample ok set zero This command sets the zero span valves to the zero mode The following example sets the instrument to zero mode that is the instrument is reading the zero gas Send set zero Receive set zero ok set span This command sets the zero span valves to the span mode The following example sets the instrument to span mode that is the instrument is reading span gas Send set span Receive set span ok gas unit This command reports the current gas units ppm or mg m The example reports that the gas unit is set to ppm Send gas unit Receive gas unit ppm set gas unit unit unit ppm mg m This command sets the gas units to ppm or mg m The following example sets the gas units to meim Send set gas unit mg m3 Receive set gas unit mg m3 ok pres comp This command reports whether pressure compensation is on or off The following example shows that pressure compensation is on Send pres comp Receive pres comp on set pres comp onoff onoff on off These commands turn the pressure compensation on or off The following example turns pressure compensation off Send set pres comp off Receive set pres comp off ok Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configurati
253. ry B 24 02 Reports the oxygen concentration percent B 11 02 corr Reports sets oxygen correction compensation on or off B 38 02 corr conc Reports sets the corrected concentration of oxygen B 11 02 gas Reports sets 02 span gas concentration B 30 02 temp Reports temperature of the oxygen sensor B 12 oc Reports sets oxygen correction compensation on or off B 38 power up mode Reports sets the power up mode as local or remote B 46 pres Reports current reaction chamber pressure B 12 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page pres comp Reports sets pressure compensation on or off B 37 program no Reports analyzer program number B 47 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 33 range Reports sets current CO range B 35 range mode Reports sets current range mode B 36 ratio Reports sample reference ratio B 13 relay stat Reports sets relay logic status to for the designated relay s B 52 ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 33 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 33 sample Sets zero span valves to sample mode B 36 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 40 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 40 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response Use B 34 iscreen instead sp conc Reports sets span concentration B 29 sp field Reports sets item number and name in
254. scratch pad list B 25 span Sets zero span valves to span mode B 37 span cal reset Reports sets span cal reset on off B 30 span calibrate Sets CO coefficient B 27 span dev Reports sets span deviation maximum span check offset B 31 span dur Reports sets how long span gas is sampled by the instrument B 31 sr Reports the last srec stored B 21 srec Reports maximum number of srecs B 21 srec format Reports sets output format for srecs ASCII or binary B 22 srec layout Reports current layout of srec data B 23 srec mem size Reports maximum number of srecs that can be stored B 23 srec per Reports sets srec logging period B 23 stream per Reports sets current set time interval for streaming data B 26 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 26 temp comp Reports sets temperature compensation on or off B 38 time Reports sets current time 24 hour time B 40 tz Reports sets the timezone string for the network time protocol B 47 server up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 33 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Ba C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Measurements B 10 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Command Description Page version Reports version of all the firmware components B 19 zero Sets zero span valves to zero mode B 37 zero cal reset Reports sets zero cal reset on off B 31 zero calibrate Sets CO coefficient B 26 zero dev Reports sets zero deviation maximum zero check offset B 32
255. screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Instrument The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the Configuration hardware configuration of the instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu Contact Information Alarms Menu 3 68 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing will toggle the selected item between yes and no with the exception of dilution ratio and auto calibration which may be only enabled at the factory A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration Ca fyl PME TY Led fat The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information The Alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed To see the actual reading of an item and
256. screen in single mode For more information about the dual and auto range modes see Single Range Mode Dual Range Mode and Auto Range Mode earlier in this chapter Table 3 5 lists the available preset ranges e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Range Table 3 5 Available Operating Ranges ppm mg m 50 50 100 100 200 200 500 500 1000 1000 2000 2000 5000 5000 10000 10000 20000 20000 C1 C1 C2 C2 c3 C3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Custom Ranges Custom Ranges Averaging Time Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Averaging Time C1 C2 and C3 are custom ranges For more information about custom ranges see Set Custom Ranges below The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges which are user defined In the ppm or mg m mode any value between 50 and 20000 mg m can be specified as a range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges The display shows the current custom range The next line of the display is used to set the range To use the custom full scale range be sure to select it Custom range 1 2 or 3 in the CO Ranges screen For more information about selecting ranges see CO Range above e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges gt Custom Range 1 2 or 3 PONGE CO hiv PS PHP ESE ri The Averaging Time defines a time
257. se _ and ro move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons gt S 3 D Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Soft Keys Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function Soft Keys The soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below rt Run The rt is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the CO concentration Menu The is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The a is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press 2 for a brief ex
258. sensor should be calibrated at the zero and span points as described in the following procedure Note The total airflow of the calibration gases must exceed the total demand of the analyzer The Model 487 High Level requires approximately 1000 cc min of sample flow so a total airflow of at least 1100 cc min is recommended A Use the following procedure to calibrate the oxygen sensor under normal conditions If you are unable to calibrate the oxygen sensor effectively using the following procedure use the Alternate Calibration Procedure Calibration Equipment Test gas Nitrogen zero gas span gas approximately 20 oxygen concentration 1 Supply the nitrogen zero gas to the SAMPLE port on the rear of the analyzer and wait for the O reading to stabilize Thermo Fisher Scientific Alternate Sensor Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Optional Equipment Internal Oxygen 02 Sensor 2 From the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate O Background and press to set the O2 background to zero 3 Supply the O2 Span gas to the SAMPLE port on the rear of the analyzer and wait for the O2 reading to stabilize A From the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate O2 Coefficient enter the span concentration and press to set the Oz coefficient Note If you were unable to calibrate the oxygen sensor effectively using this procedure recalibrate using the Alternate Sensor Calibration procedure that follows A Use
259. sent that could result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored amp A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert f WARNING Description The Model 48i High Level is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A Thermo Fisher Scientific FCC Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual FCC Compliance Alert Description CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings A Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A Some internal components can be damaged b
260. single mode The high ratio commands reports the sample reference ratio using high averaging time and the low ratio command using low averaging time when operating in dual or auto mode The following example shows that the current ratio is 1 161100 Send ratio Receive ratio 1 161100 flags This reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status of the AGC circuit pressure and temperature compensation status gas units gas mode and alarms To decode the flags each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in the Figure B 1 It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter In the following example the instrument is reporting that the AGC circuit is on that the instrument is in the span gas mode and that the CO high concentration alarm is activated Send flags Receive flags 80068000 WW Figure B 14 Flags Field Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms Alarms B 14 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual alarm agc intensity min alarm agc intensity max These commands report the agc intensity alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the agc intensity alarm minimum value is 20 Send alarm agc intensity min Receive alarm agc intensity min 20 set alarm agc intensity min value set alarm agc intensity max value These commands set the agc intensity alarm minimum and maximum values to va
261. sriesrrersrersseessreesrresee 3 30 Other Klee ee EE 3 31 Anal g aptent ebe 3 31 Comimnit E EE 3 32 Reset to Default Content EE 3 32 Configure Dataloggin eege eerste deenen 3 33 eer 3 33 Memory Allocation euer 3 33 Deiene Enote i EETA E E A E 3 34 Flag Status Data eegenen ene 3 34 Communication Settings sseeseseeeessesereresrsrtsrestertsrrstrsrssrrresreseerene 3 35 Serial EE ee 3 35 Baud EE 3 35 RN EE 3 36 Et eegen E ee moines 3 36 KREE 3 36 RS 232 RS 485 SELECHON E 3 37 Instrument IDs EE EE 3 37 Gesyt c Seral EE 3 38 Communication Kreeser 3 38 Streaming Data Configuration esessesessessrsrrresesesesesses 3 39 Streaming Data Interval eege 3 40 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents PREV ANCL DEE 3 40 Prepend Timestamp sisir tasein isasara iE ereke ERSEN eens 3 40 Add Flags ni a aed roa reirei E ea ae ue 3 40 Choose Stream Data terns itcveccscaraccectvcusensdisusdecanveusduatdevetaaheaezeeics 3 41 Concentrati ONS eeneg ene 3 41 Corrected Concentrations jis ee 3 41 RE 3 42 Analog INPUTS ee eege 3 42 TCP IP E 3 43 Se Re EEN 3 43 E 3 44 IN et EE 3 44 WSR ACC WAY ok Wee ee 3 44 Host Names vais scinnscsausidesveutiasiviesanivsaaunaseisiedaentaiese 3 45 Network Time Protocol SEELEN ect heart 3 45 VO Configuration iu cichsancnaainunndunnnuecinwainiaeds 3 45 EE 3 46 EE 3 46 EE 3 47 Eed eegene ene 3 47 Non Alarm EE 3 48 Digital Input E asic tine he elecwccecsse inte ee ene tcee Miele 3 48 E 3 49 peter TEE 3 49 Analog Output
262. sseesseseessesressssrresss 4 2 Pressure Regulator for CO Standard Cylinder eee 4 2 Mixine ham bets Eeer 4 3 uae tne lee veer ee WEE 4 3 Pr Calibration ji2eceis tepesiedlacceleita eetdiaccnateapecnensleeriedhacdeataeccs 4 3 AAMAS CAE EON 5 s entiseeni e aeaniee iair lariena kesediaan 4 3 Connect the Instrument sssesssesssseeeiesseeesesrsrstsrsrsrsrsrsrsesrsesesesesesee 4 3 EE 4 4 GHEET Ate ert PE A et etre tee oe 4 5 Calibration Frequency scaitedetiici delineated deen 4 6 Periodic Zero and Span e EE 4 6 HI and LO Multi Point Calibration sssesssesessesesesssssssrssreresrsesesesssss 4 7 Defatilt E 4 7 Cal Point 152 EE 4 7 EE 4 9 Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance s csssssssssssssseseecsssesssssseesnssneseesenesnesneensaeeaees 5 1 Safety Pr ca tio s ee ee ee 5 1 Replacement EE 5 2 Cleaning the Outside Case icici snescetintecdtesilaaraetienieanle 5 2 Cl aningthe Et sit etan ee a R e e Tori e EESE ESE 5 2 IR Source Replacement 2 2 j ccecsinaeuidiascdepecnstli sii eotacietiaesiet 5 3 Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning ee 5 3 Leak Test and Pump Check E 5 4 External Leaks ona reene 5 4 Leaks Across the Optional Zero Span and Sample Solenoid Valves 5 5 Pump Rebuilding ccis 2rrecitanoviice aes a i s 5 5 Disassembly reegt 5 5 Assembly with New Diaphragm and Valkee A 5 8 Chapter 6 Troubleshtontmgergreeeeeeesgr erer 6 1 Safety terme Seite ee eege 6 1 Troubleshooting EE 6 1 Board Leve
263. supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 Force Write Single Coil 0x05 0x06 Read Exception Status If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes below In MODBUS over serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 48i High Level Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query
264. sure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum Limits pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Min or Max re Sample Flow The Sample Flow screen displays the current sample flow reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 350 to 1 500 L min If the sample flow reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Sample Flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Alarms Menu 3 72 Min and Max Sample Flow Limits Bias Voltage Min and Max Bias Voltage Limits Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual The Minimum Sample Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum sample flow alarm limit The minimum and maximum sample flow screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Sample Flow gt Min or Max The Bias Voltage screen displays the current bias voltage reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 130 to 100 volts If the bias voltage reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in th
265. t This command reports that the zero cal reset is on or off The following example reports that the zero cal reset is off Send zero cal reset Receive zero cal reset off set zero cal reset onoff onoff on off This command sets the zero cal reset on or off The following example turns the zero cal reset off Send set zero cal reset off Receive set zero cal reset off ok Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 32 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual zero dev This command reports the zero deviation maximum zero check offset The following example reports that the zero deviation is 10 ppb Send zero dev Receive zero dev 1 000 E 01 set zero dev value This command sets the zero deviation maximum zero check offset to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in current selected units The following example sets the zero deviation to 10 ppb Send set zero dev 1 000 E 01 Receive set zero dev 1 000 E 01 ok zero dur This command reports the zero duration The following example reports that the zero duration is 10 minutes Send zero dur 10 Receive zero dur 10 ok set zero dur value This command sets the zero duration to value where value represents the zero duration in minutes The following example sets the zero duration to 15 minutes Send set zero dur 15 Receive set zero dur 15 ok zs period This command r
266. t Address on page D 2 e Abbreviations Used on page D 2 e Basic Command Structure on page D 2 e Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt on page D 3 e Gesytec Commands on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support Gesytec protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual D 1 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the Gesytec protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for Gesytec 9882 The Gesytec instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by a 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The instrument address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The instrument address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through
267. t controls menu item Send menutext Receive menutext main menu instrument controls SC screen These commands are meant for backward compatibility with the C series Screen information is instead reported using the iscreen command above Send screen Receive screen This is an ISeries instrument Screen information not available B 34 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific range high range low range C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration These commands report CO range in single range mode or the high and low ranges in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The following example reports that the CO full scale range is set to 50 ppm according to Table B fe Send range Receive set range selection set high range selection set low range selection range 5 5 000E 01 ppb These commands select the CO full scale ranges according to Table B 7 The following example sets the CO full scale range to 50 ppm Send set range 5 set range 5 ok Receive Table B 7 Standard Ranges Selection ppm mg m 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 5 5 3 10 10 4 20 20 5 50 50 6 100 100 7 200 200 8 500 500 9 1000 1000 10 2000 2000 11 5000 5000 12 10000 10000 13 C1 C1 14 C2 C2 15 C3 C3 Model 48 High Leve
268. t conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding reading value Only two points are Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table Point Volts 3 56 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Table Points TO UEP Tri bei miv ig SRLS iPr The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Point 1 10 A Mihei i The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select C
269. t the calibration Fan Filter Inspection Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 H 1 and Cleaning 1 Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter 2 Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free purge will help the drying process or blow the filter clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filter and fan guard Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Leak Test and Pump Check Out Leak Test and Pump Check Out External Leaks 5 4 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Mounting Screws 4 Filter Fan Guard Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan There are two major types of leaks external leaks and leaks across the optional zero span solenoid valve seals Use the following procedure to test for external leaks 1 Disconnect the sample input line and plug the SAMPLE fitting 2 Press to display the Main Menu 3 Press to move the cursor to Diagnostics and press to display the Diagnostics menu 4 Dress to move the cursor to Flow and press to display the Sample Flow screen The flow reading should indicate zero flow and the pressure reading should be less than 250 mmHg If not check to see that all fittings are tight and that none of the input lines are cracked or broken For detailed information about this screen refer to the Operation chapter If the pump
270. table per channel Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 digital relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial Ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate 1200 115200 data bits parity and stop bits protocols C Link MODBUS Gesytec Bayern Hessen and streaming data all user selectable Ethernet connection RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP addressing ln non condensing environments Table 1 2 Model 48i High Level Optional Internal Oxygen Sensor Specifications Technology Paramagnetic Pm Range 0 100 02 Accuracy Intrinsic error lt 0 1 02 Linearity lt 0 1 02 Repeatability lt 0 1 02 Zero Drift lt 0 2 0z per month excludes up to 0 1 0 in the first 24 hours of operation Response Time T10 Te0 lt 2 5 seconds Weight 1 4 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Approximately 2 Ibs in addition to standard instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Lifting A Unpacking and Thermo Fisher Scientific Inspection Chapter 2 Installation Installation of the Model 487 High Level includes lifting the instrument unpacking and inspection connecting sample zero span and exhaust lines and attaching the analog and or digital outputs to a recording device The installation
271. tate that is assigned to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarm or non alarm to choose from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State Alarms The Alarms screen allows the user to select the alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt after it The I O board status alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed Zero and Span Check Cal are only present if the automated zero span check is enabled The O2 conc items are only displayed if the internal O2 sensor option is installed See the Alarms Menu section later in this chapter for more information on alarm items e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms CO mid Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Non Alarm The Non Alarm status screen allows the user to select the non alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm CO Guided Pii ERE i Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 d
272. the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part
273. the motherboard and the function key panel and graphics display It serves as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description 1 0 Components 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Outputs Analog Current Outputs Optional 8 8 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a
274. the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The following example shows the output format for lrecs is ASCII with text according to Table Ba Send lrec format Receive lrec format 1 set lrec format format set srec format format set erec format format These commands set the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data according to Table B 5 The following example sets the lrec output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Table B 5 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data lrec layout srec layout erec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the erec rec srec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s lx f f f At t D L ffff s r pres intensity motor lrec mem size srec mem size These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and srecs The following example shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for lrecs and the maximum number of Irecs that
275. the user when the button is Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 57 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition B 58 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg Zen This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Thermo Fisher Scientific Parameters Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other measurement values read the status of the digita
276. tion gt Digital Input Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument Action fb pikari 1 Fi PEE The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and individual current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Allow Over Under Range Analog Output Configuration Select Action 3 50 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config BUEN Saad La ake POES sed Pi EE EE The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 5 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Allow Over Under Range CHATI Proprio ee a Lb iL i The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to adjust for the selected output channel Configuration choices include
277. tion Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Bench Heater Assembly Replacement on page 7 17 e Detector Preamplifier Assembly Replacement on page 7 18 e Preamp Board Calibration on page 7 20 e Pump Replacement on page 7 20 e Pressure Transducer Replacement on page 7 21 e Pressure Transducer Calibration on page 7 22 e Flow Transducer Replacement on page 7 25 e Flow Transducer Calibration on page 7 25 e Capillary Cleaning or Replacement on page 7 26 e Optional Zero Span and Sample Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7 27 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 28 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 30 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 31 e Ambient Temperature Calibration on page 7 33 e I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 34 e Internal O2 Sensor Optional Replacement on page 7 36 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 36 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 37 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 38 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 39 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 40 e Service Locations on page 7 41 7 2 Model 48i High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A A Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WA
278. tputs e 120VAC output and thermistor input from the bench heater board e Flow and pressure sensor inputs e Chopper motor output e Optical pickup input e Pre amp board e Ambient temperature thermistor e Purge flow switch input The flow sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a flow transducer with input and output gas fittings The flow transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference across a precision orifice This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample gas in the measurement system The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a pressure transducer with a gas input fitting The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Bench Heater Board Pre amp Board Assembly Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Front Panel Connector Board Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Electronics The bench heater board provides connections for the optical bench heater resistors and optical bench temperature thermistor The optical bench temperature is measured with a thermistor The voltage across the thermistor is applied to the main processor and used to display and control the temperature of the optical bench The main processor compares the voltage to a set point and controls the 120VAC
279. tween the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed The dual and auto range modes have two CO span factors high and low This allows each range to be calibrated separately This is necessary if the two ranges used are not close to one another For example a low CO range of 50 ppm and a high CO range of 1000 ppm For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration 3 20 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu Calibrate CO Background Calibrate CO Coefficient The Calibrate CO Background screen is used to adjust the instrument zero or background Before making an adjustment be sure the analyzer samples zero air for at least 5 minutes It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating The longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be To be most accurate use the 300 second averaging time For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal CO Background Chr COOL r TT Cor PPP LES YE JA The Calibrate CO Coefficient screen is used to adjust the CO coefficient and enter the span concentration The display shows the current CO concentration reading and the current CO range The next line of the display is where the CO calibration gas conce
280. u high range low point This will ensure that the high and low range concentration curves will overlap If both of these methods are unacceptable due to local regulations then the dual range mode should be used so that the range selection may be evaluated by the user to meet their reulations A Figure 3 6 Analog Output in Auto Range Mode By default in the auto range mode the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 7 See Table 3 4 for channels and pin connections Auto range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 78 ecocooceocoo00000o 0000000000000000000 37 Figure 3 7 Pin Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode 3 12 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu Table 3 4 Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 CO Analog Output 2 33 3 Range Status half scale high range zero scale low range 3 15 5 None 4 34 7 None 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A Gas Units The Gas Units screen defines how the CO concentration reading is expressed Gas units of parts per million ppm and milligrams per cub
281. ue is a floating point number representing motor speed alarm limits in minutes The following example sets the motor speed alarm maximum value to 100 2 Send set alarm motor speed max 100 2 Receive set alarm motor speed max 100 2 ok alarm pressure min alarm pressure max These commands report the pressure alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the pressure alarm minimum value is 650 mmHg Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms Send alarm pressure min Receive alarm pressure min 650 mmHg set alarm pressure min value set alarm pressure max value These commands set the pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the pressure alarm maximum value to 790 mmHg Send set alarm pressure max 790 Receive set alarm pressure max 790 ok alarm sample flow min alarm sample flow max These commands report the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The following example reports that the sample flow alarm minimum value is 0 350 L min Send alarm sample flow min Receive alarm sample flow min 0 350 l min set alarm sample flow min value set alarm sample flow max value These commands set the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number r
282. ulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument Refer to Appendix C for detailed MODBUS protocol information e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Communication Protocol EPL CO mnie PE Le wen EE eee PEE EE Streaming Data The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration Configuration of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Item Signal submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Corrected Concentrations if the O2 compensation option is enabled Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed Note The selected item list is different depending on the AUTO MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings Changing either of these settings will produce a different set of streaming data items If either of these modes is going to be changed on a regular basis then the user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting amp e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 48 7 High Level Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Streaming Data Interval Add Labels Prepend Timestamp Add Flags 3 40 Model 487 High Level Instruction
283. urements and status in the specified format erec format Reports sets erec format ASCII or binary B 22 erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 23 flags Reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status B 13 of the AGC circuit pressure and temperature compensation status gas units gas mode and alarms flow Reports current measured sample flow in L min B 11 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 43 gas mode Reports current mode of sample zero or span B 36 gas unit Reports sets current gas units B 37 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 33 high avg time Reports sets high range averaging time B 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page high co Reports CO concentration calculated with high range B 11 coefficients high co coef Reports sets high range CO coefficients B 27 high coef 0 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from hi multi point B 28 calibration high coef 1 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from hi multi point B 28 calibration high coef 2 Reports coefficients of the curve developed from hi multi point B 28 calibration high range Reports selects current CO high range B 35 high ratio Reports sample reference ratio calculated using the high B 13 averaging time high sp conc Reports sets high span concentration B 29 host n
284. user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs The optional I O expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Relay Outputs Digital Inputs System Description 1 0 Components The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND Eight analog voltage inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs All voltage
285. ut 02 Sensor NC NC NC Analog Input 02 Sensor Temperature Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 14 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 15 NC 16 5V Z S J13 24V 2 Zero Span Solenoid Control SAMPLE J14 24V 2 Sample Solenoid Control SPAN1 J15 24V 2 Converter Solenoid Control SPAN2 J16 24V 2 Span 2 Solenoid Control DATA J17 Ground 2 RS485 from Motherboard 3 RS485 from Motherboard 24V IN J18 24V Input 2 Ground FAN J19 24V Fused 2 Ground FAN SW1 J20 24V Fused 2 Fan Control FAN SW2 J21 24V Fused 2 Fan Control Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram Connector Label MOTHERBOARD Reference Designator J1 Pin mo N OQO wo A WO N Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 9 LDO LCD Signal 10 LD5 LCD Signal 11 LD1 LCD Signal 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltagel 17 5V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypa
286. value where value is set to either floor or ceiling according to Table B 4 The following example sets the O2 concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling Send set alarm trig conc 02 1 Receive set alarm trig conc oi 1 ok agc int This command reports the current intensity of the reference channel AGC circuit The following example reports that the current AGC intensity is 200 000 Hz Send agc int Receive agc int 200000 Hz bias voltage This command reports the current IR bias supply voltage The following example reports that the bias voltage is 102 3 volts Send bias voltage Receive bias voltage 102 3 V diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 24 1 14 9 4 9 3 2 3 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Datalogging Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 positive 18 IR positive 18 MOT and VBIAS Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 24 1 14 9 14 9 4 9 3 2 17 9 17 9 diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic
287. vel Instruction Manual The Series instruments include a built in datalogging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two different types of records which for historical reasons are named Irecs and srecs Each record can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record generation is tied to the instrument s real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other For example an srec containing just the current concentration level could be generated every five minutes while an Irec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full lrec containing 32 data items and a full srec containing 32 items once each minute for a week gt 20 000 total records If logging is limited to the minimum content of date time concentration and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months gt 190 000 total records The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is stored and recorded e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operat
288. voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 24 1 4 9 3 2 3 2 version This command reports the version of all the firmware components The following example shows a list of firmware components that were displayed by issuing the version command The components displayed will vary depending on the configuration of the instrument Send version Receive version Program 01 05 79 225 Library 01 01 60 167 Kernel 2 4 24 uc0 003 Thermo Board 81 File usr application hex Board App 11 3 100 Bl 4 0 97 File App 11 3 100 Bl 4 0 97 Board 84 File usr application hex Board App 11 3 100 Bl 4 0 97 File App 11 3 100 Bl 4 0 97 Arc Bl 170711 clr records This command will clear all lrecs and srecs that have been saved Send clr records Receive clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs These commands will clear only the lrecs or only the srecs that have been saved The following example clears srecs Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 20 Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the lrecs or srecs The following ex
289. w Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically because a letter was detected when the value should be numeric data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command can t wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters in FLASH memory It is important that this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure When interfacing to an instrument via C link commands always enter the concentration values in ppb or pg m units For example to set a background value to 20 ppm enter 20000 ppb as the value for the set background command Convert concentration formats from xxxxE yy to x xxxE tyy The Series uses more standard script than the C Series by placing only one digit to the left of the decimal Table B 2 lists the 487 High Level C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table RB 3 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page 1 Simulates pressing soft key 1 pushbutton B 33 2 Simulates pressing soft key 2 pushbutton B 33 3 Simulates pressing soft key 3 pushbutton B 33 4 Simulates pressing soft key 4 pushbutton B 33
290. wing example reports that the current baud rate is 9600 baud Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate to rate The following example sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration dhcp This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP as on or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the instrument automatically The following example shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff onoff on off This command enables on and disables off the DHCP service When DHCP is set to on the instrument gets the IP address the netmask address and the gateway address from a DHCP server When DHCP is set to off the instrument gets these addresses from system memory The following example sets the DHCP service to on Note If DHCP is changed from on to off and then the IP address the netmask address or the gateway address is changed you must cycle power to the instrument before the change takes effect Until you cycle the power the address assigned by the DHCP server will sti
291. y are functioning properly The display pixel test is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Model 48 High Level Instruction Manual 3 93 Operation Password Restore User Defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test CHS mTOR pH Ciieh K d e POE Sueed and Pih E Z S The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Password 3 94 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still be changed via remote operation When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Passwor
292. y in auto range mode The O2 conc items are only displayed if the internal O2 sensor option is installed The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The following example shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Choose Signal to Output 3 52 Model 487 High Level Instruction Manual DH pikari Pii ERE i Table 3 6 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table Output Zero Value Full Scale 100 Value co Zero 0 LO CO Zero 0 HI CO Zero 0 Range Status Recommend not to change the setting for this output Sample Reference Ratio 0 0 1 2 LO Sample Reference Ratio 0 0 1 2 HI Sample Reference Ratio 0 0 1 2 Internal Temperature User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Bench Temperature User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Sample Flow User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Intensity User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Motor Speed User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Bias Voltage User set alarm min value User set alarm max value 0 Zero 0 100 0 02 Sensor Temp Zero 0
293. y small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other ketone based or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interferen
294. zero dur Reports sets how long zero gas is sampled by the instrument B 32 zs avg time Reports sets zero span averaging time B 33 zs period Reports sets zero span period B 32 avg time high avg time low avg time These commands report the averaging time in seconds when operating in single range or averaging time used with the high and low ranges when operating in dual or auto range mode The following example shows that the averaging time is 300 seconds according to Table B 3 Send avg time Receive avg time 11 300 sec set avg time selection set high avg time selection set low avg time selection These commands set the averaging time high and low averaging times according to Table B 3 The following example sets the low range averaging time to 120 seconds Send set low avg time 8 Receive set low avg time 8 ok Table B 3 Averaging Times Selection Averaging Time seconds 0 1 seconds 1 2 2 5 3 10 4 20 5 30 6 60 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Selection Averaging Time seconds 7 90 8 120 9 180 10 240 11 300 co high co low co These commands report the measured CO concentration when operating in single range or high and low CO when operating in dual or auto range mode The following example shows that the CO concentration is 40 ppm Send CO Receive CO 4 000E 1 ppm oi This command reports the oxygen c

Model 48i-HL - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents